Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
ENGLISH
Camera User Guide
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
: Previous page
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
: Page before you clicked a link
Accessories
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
Appendix
Index
©CANON INC. 2014
CDD-E598-010
1
Before Use
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information
Part Names and Conventions in This
Guide
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (
)
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
8
3
9
10
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
17
)
( )( ) ( )
18 19 20
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
(
)
)
)
14
15
16
(
(
(
)
11
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
(
(
)
12
)
13
● Although the LCD monitor and viewfinder are produced under
extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than
99.99% of the pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some
pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does
not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
(1) Zoom lever
(10) External microphone IN terminal
(11) Focal length markings (approx.)
(12) Lens
Shooting: [
[
(telephoto)] /
(wide angle)]
Accessories
● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection
against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before
using the camera.
Playback: [ (magnify)] /
Appendix
(13) Lens hood/filter adapter mount
[
(2) Shutter button
(3) Strap mount
(4) Front dial
(5) Mode dial
(6) Flash
(index)]
(14)
[
(Framing Assist – Seek)]
button
(N-Mark)*
(Framing Assist – Lock)]
button
Index
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
(15)
(16)
[
(17) Tripod socket
(7) Microphone
(8) Lamp
(18) Lock release switch
(19) Memory card/battery cover
(20) DC coupler cable port
(9) Speaker
3
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
Before Use
( ) ( )
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( )
13
4
5
6
7
8
9
( )
3
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(
(
)
)
14
[
[
[
] Front dial (4) on front
] Up button (16) on back
] Left button (22) on back
[
[
] Right button (18) on back
] Down button (19) on back
15
( )
2
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
(
(
)
)
)
16
17
18
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
1
●
●
●
: Important information you should know
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
19
)
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
(
)(
)
(
12
)
(
)
(
) (
)
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
10 11
22
21 20
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(1) Screen (LCD monitor)
(2) Wi-Fi antenna area
(3) Diopter adjustment dial
(4) Viewfinder
(14) Movie button
● The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
(15)
(16)
[
[
(AF frame selector)] button
(Wi-Fi)] / [ (Single shot)] /
Up button
(17) FUNC./SET button
(5) Hot shoe
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
[
[
[
[
(Flash)] / Right button
(Display)] / Down button
(6) Power button
(7)
[
(Shortcut)] button
Accessories
] button
(8) Remote terminal
(Mobile Device Connection)]
(9) AV OUT (Audio/video output) /
DIGITAL terminal
Appendix
button
(22)
[
(Macro)] / [
(Manual focus)]
(10) Indicator
Index
/ Left button
(11)
[
(Playback)] button
(12) HDMITM terminal
(13)
[
[
(Exposure compensation)] /
(Single-image erase)] button
4
Before Use
Table of Contents
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
5
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
6
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
7
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
8
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
9
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
10
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
11
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
Before Use
Common Camera Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Poster Effect
Fish-Eye Effect
Shoot
(
(
( 62)
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Miniature Effect
Toy Camera Effect
Soft Focus
( 64)
● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
(
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
-
Shooting people well
Monochrome
(
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Focus on faces
Portraits
Against Snow
-
(
(
● Without using the flash (Flash Off)
-
Matching specific scenes
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
● Add a date stamp
Accessories
Sports
Night Scenes
Low Light
-
(
(
( 59)
● Use Face ID
Appendix
-
Index
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
Fireworks
-
(
12
Before Use
View
Save
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● View images (Playback Mode)
● Save images to a computer via a cable
-
-
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
● Save images to a computer
-
-
Use Wi-Fi Functions
● Send images to a smartphone
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● On a TV
-
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● On a computer
-
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
-
● Browse through images quickly
● Share images online
-
-
● Erase images
● Send images to a computer
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
-
Shoot/View Movies
● Shoot movies
-
-
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
Accessories
● Fast-moving subjects, slow-motion playback
-
Print
● Print pictures
Appendix
Index
-
13
● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
Before Use
Safety Precautions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
● Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at intense
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial
light source.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
This could damage your eyesight.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or fire. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
Warning
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
● Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage
eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the flash.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, fire, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately flush with water.
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
Accessories
● Use only recommended power sources.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel off the label, if the battery pack has one.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
Appendix
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
Index
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
14
● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your fingers with the lowering flash.
This could result in injury.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
Caution
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Denotes the possibility of injury.
Caution
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense artificial light source.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push
the flash down or pry it open.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the flash.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
Accessories
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
Appendix
- Humid or dusty places
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, fire, burns, or
other injuries.
Index
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.
● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
● When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
15
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or fire.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
This may cause the product to malfunction.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
16
Before Use
Initial Preparations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching Accessories
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting
and playback
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Attach the strap.
( )
1
5
● Attach the included strap to the camera
as shown.
( )
4
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
3
( )
2
● On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
( )
1
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Attach the lens cap.
2
( )
1
● Remove the lens cap from the lens and
attach the lens cap cord to the strap.
( )
2
( )
1
Accessories
Appendix
Index
17
Charge the battery pack.
2
Before Use
( )
2
● Always remove the lens cap before
turning the camera on. Try clipping the
lens cap to the neck strap when the cap
is not in use.
● CB-2LC: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
( )
1
● CB-2LCE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
CB-2LC
● Keep the lens cap on the lens when the
camera is not in use.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
Holding the Camera
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● When charging is finished, the lamp turns
green.
CB-2LCE
● Place the strap around your neck.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers
on it.
Remove the battery pack.
( )
1
3
● After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
( )
2
Charging the Battery Pack
●
●
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
Accessories
Insert the battery pack.
1
Appendix
● Remove the cover from the battery pack,
( )
1
align the
marks on the battery pack
Index
and charger, and insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
( )
2
18
Insert the battery pack.
2
Before Use
●
●
●
●
For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
● Holding the battery pack with the
terminals (1) facing as shown, press the
battery lock (2) in the direction of the
arrow and insert the battery pack until the
lock clicks shut.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
( )
2
Camera Basics
● If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always confirm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
with
visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
( )
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
uncharged one.
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Check the card’s write-protect tab
and insert the memory card.
3
● Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect tab when the
tab is in the locked position. Slide the tab
to the unlocked position.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
● Insert the memory card with the label (1)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera
( )
1
● Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
(
Accessories
Open the cover.
1
( )
2
● Slide the switch (1) and open the cover
Appendix
Close the cover.
4
(2).
● Lower the cover in the direction of the
arrow and press it until it clicks into the
closed position.
( )
1
Index
●
For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
19
Before Use
Using the Screen
Setting the Date and Time
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
● Open the screen (1) and rotate it toward
the lens 180° (2).
( )
2
( )
1
● Close the screen in this orientation (3).
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
( )
3
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Turn the camera on.
1
● Press the power button.
●
The screen can only open to approximately 175° in direction (1).
Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will
damage the camera.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
Set the date and time.
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● You can adjust the angle and orientation
of the screen as needed, to suit shooting
conditions.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the
date and time.
● When finished, press the [ ] button.
● To protect the screen when the camera
is not in use, always keep it closed and
facing the camera body.
Accessories
●
●
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
deactivate the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the
camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewfinder.
When including yourself in shots, you can view a mirror image
of yourself by rotating the screen around toward the front of the
Appendix
Specify your home time zone.
3
Index
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
camera. To cancel reverse display, press the [
] button,
choose [Reverse Disp.] on the [ ] tab, and press the [ ][
buttons to choose [Off].
]
Finish the setup process.
4
● Press the [ ] button when finished.
After a confirmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
● To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
20
Before Use
●
●
Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
●
●
Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC
adapter kit (sold separately,
off.
To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing the Date and Time
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjust the date and time as follows.
Display Language
Access the menu screen.
1
● Press the [
] button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Change the display language as needed.
Enter Playback mode.
1
● Press the [
] button.
Choose [Date/Time].
2
● Move the zoom lever to choose the [
]
tab.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
Access the setting screen.
2
Accessories
[Date/Time], and then press the [
button.
]
● Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Change the date and time.
3
Index
● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
● Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
21
Set the display language.
3
Before Use
Trying the Camera Out
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a language, and then press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
Still Images
Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
● Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Turn the camera on.
1
●
●
The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
● Press the power button.
pressing the [ ] button before you press the [
] button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
● The startup screen is displayed.
You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language
] on the [ ] tab.
Enter [
] mode.
2
● Set the mode dial to [
].
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
Accessories
● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
Appendix
● Frames displayed around any detected
Index
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Compose the shot.
3
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
22
Shoot.
4
Shooting Movies
Before Use
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
1) Start shooting.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
● Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
(1)
time (1).
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● If [Raise the flash] is displayed, lift the
flash with your finger to prepare it for use.
If you prefer not to use the flash, push it
down with your finger, into the camera.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
2) Finish shooting.
● Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
Accessories
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down.
Appendix
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
Index
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
23
Play movies.
3
Before Use
Viewing
● Press the [ ] button to access the movie
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
control panel, press the [ ][ ] buttons
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
to choose [ ], and then press the [
button again.
]
● Playback now begins, and after the movie
is finished, [ ] is displayed.
● To adjust the volume (1), press the
][ ] buttons.
Enter Playback mode.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Press the [
] button.
(1)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Your last shot is displayed.
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
Browse through your images.
2
● To view the previous image, press the [
button. To view the next image, press the
] button.
]
[
Erasing Images
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
Choose an image to erase.
1
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
Accessories
Erase the image.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons
for at least one second. In this mode,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse
through images.
2
● Press the [ ] button.
Appendix
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and
Index
then press the [ ] button.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [ ][
]
● Movies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
] icon.
buttons to choose [Cancel], and then
press the [ ] button.
●
24
Before Use
On/Off
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Mode
1
● Press the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including
shooting and playback options
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Playback Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [
] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
● To turn the camera off, press the [
]
button again.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
●
To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [
button.
]
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
25
Before Use
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
Shutter Button
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of
inactivity.
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
Camera Basics
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Press halfway. (Press lightly to focus.)
1
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
Power Saving in Playback Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of
inactivity.
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
2
●
●
You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
● The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
(
Accessories
●
●
Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
Appendix
Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Index
26
Before Use
Viewfinder
Shooting Modes
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adjust the viewfinder display for sharper images by adjusting the diopter,
as follows.
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
( )
5
Activate the viewfinder.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
( )
1
● Press the [ ] button several times until
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
3
( )
6
Adjust the diopter.
2
( )
4
( )
7
● As you look through the viewfinder, turn
the dial one way or the other so that
images look sharp.
(1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(5) P, Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Modes
Take a variety of shots using
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(
(2) Creative Shot Mode
(6) Movie Mode
See several effects applied to
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
(3) Sports Mode
Shoot continuously as the camera
focuses on moving subjects
Accessories
(
(4) Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
(7) Creative Filters Mode
Appendix
Add a variety of effects to images
Index
27
Before Use
●
●
Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
Shooting Display Options
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will deactivate
the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the camera body) to
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
LCD Monitor (Screen)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
No information is displayed
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Information is displayed
Viewfinder
Accessories
Appendix
No information is displayed
Information is displayed
Index
28
Finish the setup process.
4
Before Use
Using the FUNC. Menu
● Press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● The screen before you pressed the
Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC. menu as
follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you configured.
(
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
Access the FUNC. menu.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a menu item.
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
● Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
(2)
(1)
Accessories
Choose an option.
3
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
Appendix
Index
● Options labeled with a [
] icon can be
configured by pressing the [ ] button.
● To return to the menu items, press the
[
] button.
29
Choose a menu item.
3
Before Use
Using the Menu Screen
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
menu item.
Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting
● For menu items with options not shown,
first press the [ ] or [ ] button to switch
screens, and then press the [ ][
buttons to select the menu item.
[
], playback [
], and so on. Note that available menu items vary
]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● To return to the previous screen, press
the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the menu screen.
1
● Press the [
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose an option.
4
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
Choose a tab.
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
Finish the setup process.
● After you have pressed the [ ][
buttons to choose a tab initially, you can
switch between tabs by pressing the
]
5
● Press the [
screen displayed before you pressed the
] button in step 1.
] button to return to the
[
][ ] buttons.
[
Accessories
Appendix
●
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
Index
30
Deleting Characters
Before Use
On-Screen Keyboard
● To delete the previous character,
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
choose [
] and press the [ ] button.
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Wi-Fi connections
varies depending on the function you are using.
Alternatively, press the [ ] button.
(
Confirming Input and Returning to the
Camera Basics
Previous Screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Entering Characters
(1)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [
] button.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a character, and then press the [
button to enter it.
]
●
●
The on-screen keyboard is not available while the viewfinder
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
● The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
You can confirm input and return to the previous screen while the
on-screen keyboard is displayed by closing the screen.
Moving the Cursor
● Choose [ ] or [ ] and press the [
button.
]
Entering Line Breaks
● Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Switching Input Modes
Appendix
● To switch to numbers or symbols, choose
[
] and press the [ ] button.
Index
● To switch between uppercase and
lowercase letters, choose [ ] and press
the [ ] button.
● Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
31
Before Use
Indicator Display
Clock
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
depending on the camera status.
You can check the current time.
● Press and hold the [ ] button.
Indicator
Status
● The current time appears.
Color
Camera Status
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
to change the display color.
On
Camera on
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Recording/reading/transmitting images, distance
Green
Blinking
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [ ] button again to cancel the
clock display.
●
When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the power button to display the clock.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
32
Before Use
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
2
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Turn the camera on.
1
● Press the power button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● The startup screen is displayed.
Enter [
] mode.
2
● Set the mode dial to [
].
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
Accessories
● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
Appendix
Index
● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
33
Compose the shot.
3
Before Use
2) Shoot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject,
move it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A
zoom bar (1) showing the zoom position
is displayed, along with the area in focus
(2).)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
(1)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● To zoom in or out quickly, move the zoom
lever all the way toward [ ] (telephoto)
or [ ] (wide angle), and to zoom in
or out slowly, move it just a little in the
desired direction.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
(2)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Shooting Movies
Shoot.
4
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
1) Start shooting.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
(1)
time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● Several AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
Accessories
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Appendix
● Once recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
Index
● If [Raise the flash] is displayed, lift the
flash with your finger to prepare it for use.
If you prefer not to use the flash, push it
down with your finger, into the camera.
34
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
Before Use
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
● Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
3) Finish shooting.
Compose the shot.
2
● Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
focus.
● Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
● For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
●
The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).
Shoot.
3
● Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
Accessories
(
● The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
Appendix
Index
●
●
Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
] mode, because
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
operating the camera in other ways.
] mode, or
●
Camera operating sounds will be recorded in digest movies.
35
Still Images
Before Use
●
●
Digest movie quality is [
] and cannot be changed.
Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
●
A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
●
Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20
seconds.
If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
are changed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.
●
●
Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.
If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[Digest Type] ► [No Stills].
●
●
●
The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and
Digest Movie Playback
Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify
Accessories
Still Images/Movies
Appendix
●
You can change how long images are displayed after shots
●
●
To activate the screen when the camera is on but the screen is
(
blank (when display is set to the viewfinder), press the [ ] button
several times.
Index
If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down, the
camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the
[
] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
36
Movies
Before Use
Scene Icons
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
●
●
The camera may become warm when shooting movies repeatedly
over an extended period. This does not indicate damage.
Before shooting a movie, lower the flash with your finger. Be
careful not to touch the microphone (1) when shooting a movie.
Leaving the flash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
muffled.
In [ ] and [
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Background
( )
1
Subject
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Normal Backlit Dark*1 Sunsets Spotlights
2
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
People
3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
Moving People
Shadows on Face
Smiling
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
–
Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Sleeping
Babies
Smiling Babies
Sleeping Babies
Moving Children
Other Subjects
Other Moving Subjects
Accessories
●
●
Audio is recorded in stereo.
Appendix
[
] tab ► [Sound rec.] ► [Disable].
Index
–
–
–
–
–
Other Close-Range
Subjects
2
3
*
*
*1 Tripod Used
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
37
Continuous Shooting Scenes
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
Before Use
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway
when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following
icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous
images: [ ], [ ], or [ ].
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
Camera Basics
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam will not light up, the flash will
not fire, and the shutter sound will not be played.
(
Sleeping
(including Babies)
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the flash is set to [ ].
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
Children
●
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
Accessories
●
●
In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
Appendix
Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first
shot.
Index
●
When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
and then select [
].
38
Before Use
Image Stabilization Icons
On-Screen Frames
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in
In [
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
[
] and [
] modes.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, [
is displayed, and image stabilization for macro movie recording is
used (Hybrid IS).
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when shooting
movies at telephoto (Powered)
●
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●
●
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
In [
] mode, no [
] icon is displayed.
39
Before Use
●
Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change
depending on the zoom range.
Common, Convenient Features
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 260x enlargement.
●
●
Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
1
following step 1.
● Hold the lever until zooming stops.
● Zooming stops at the largest possible
zoom factor (before the image becomes
noticeably grainy), which is then indicated
on the screen.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off].
(1)
Move the zoom lever toward [
again.
]
2
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual
Zooming (Framing Assist – Seek)
● The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
Still Images
Movies
● (1) is the current zoom factor.
Accessories
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in, you can find it more easily
by temporarily zooming out.
Appendix
Look for the lost subject.
1
Index
● Press and hold the [ ] button.
● The camera zooms out and displays
a white frame around the area shown
before you pressed the [ ] button.
40
Reacquire the subject.
2
Before Use
Easily Composing Shots after Manual Zooming
(Framing Assist – Lock)
● Aim the camera so that the subject enters
the white frame, and then release the
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
] button.
Still Images
Movies
● The previous magnification is now
restored, so that the area within the white
frame fills the screen again.
You can reduce camera shake at the telephoto end, which makes it easier
to compose shots.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Compensate camera shake at the
telephoto end.
1
●
●
Some shooting information is not displayed while the camera is
zoomed out.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
During movie shooting, the white frame is not displayed if you
press the [ ] button. Also note that a changed zoom factor and
camera operating sounds are recorded.
● Press and hold the [ ] button. [ ] is
displayed, and image stabilization optimal
for shooting at the telephoto end is
applied.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
2
●
●
If you prefer to shoot at the zoom factor of the screen in step 1,
press the shutter button all the way down.
● While holding the [ ] button, press the
shutter button halfway to focus on the
subject, and then press it all the way
down.
You can adjust the zoom factor that the camera reverts to when
you release the [ ] button by moving the zoom lever to resize
the white frame while you hold the [ ] button.
●
●
To adjust the area displayed when the [ ] button is pressed,
Display Area], and
choose one of the three options.
Accessories
The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after
●
●
The zoom factor cannot be adjusted by pressing the [ ] button
you press the shutter button all the way down in self-timer mode
(
Appendix
(
44).
Recomposing the shot while holding down the [ ] button may
make image stabilization less effective. In this case, [ ] is
displayed in gray. If this occurs, release the [ ] button, compose
the shot, and then press it again.
Index
●
If you start recording a movie while holding down the [ ] button,
image stabilization may cause the shot to be recomposed.
41
Shoot.
3
Before Use
●
●
Although no image stabilization icon is shown while you hold
down the [ ] button, image stabilization optimal for shooting at
the telephoto end is applied.
● Even after you shoot, [ ] remains
around the face displayed at a constant
size.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To fine-tune the size of subjects gradually, move the zoom lever
while holding down the [ ] button.
● To cancel constant face display size,
press the [ ] button again. [ Auto: Off]
is displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Auto Zooming to Keep Faces at a Constant Size
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size
● When
Auto is on, press the [ ][
]
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
buttons or turn the [
the desired option.
] dial to choose
The camera automatically zooms in and out to keep a detected face
(
● The camera zooms automatically to keep
faces at the specified size.
camera automatically zooms out, and vice versa. This size can also be
adjusted, as needed.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Enter [ ] Auto mode.
1
● Press and release the [ ] button quickly.
Keep faces large enough to show facial expressions
clearly.
Face
● [ Auto: On] is displayed.
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s upper
body.
Upper Body
Whole Body
Choose the face.
2
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s entire
body.
Accessories
● [ ] is displayed once a face has been
detected.
Keep faces at the size specified by moving the zoom
lever. Release the zoom lever once the desired size
has been obtained.
Appendix
● If multiple faces are detected, press the
Manual
[
] button to switch to the face to keep
at a constant size.
Index
● The camera zooms in and out to keep the
face framed by [ ] at a constant size on
the screen.
●
A face may not be displayed at a constant size relative to the
screen at some zoom factors, or if the person’s head is tilted or
facing the camera indirectly.
●
●
During movie recording, a changed zoom factor and camera
operating sounds are recorded.
When
Auto is on, some shooting information is not displayed,
and some shooting settings cannot be configured.
42
Reacquire the subject.
3
Before Use
●
If the person whose face is framed with [ ] moves toward the
edge of the screen, the camera zooms out to keep the person in
view.
● Once you find the subject and stop
moving the camera, the camera zooms
in again.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
In step 3, switching [ ] to another face with the [
not possible during movie recording.
] button is
The zoom factor remains the same after you press the shutter
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
person’s size relative to the screen changes.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
]
tab ► [ Auto Settings] ► [ Auto Zoom]. You can choose
[Off] to deactivate this feature and use only the feature described
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever when [Face], [Upper
Body], or [Whole Body] is selected, but the original zoom factor
will be restored in a few seconds after you release the lever.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
4
● To cancel this mode, press the [
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.
]
pressing the [ ] button. To resume detection, press the button
again.
●
●
You can clear your specified face size during movie recording by
pressing the [ ] button.
●
●
The camera does not zoom out automatically while [ ] is
displayed around a detected face, even if you move the camera.
When the feature described in “Auto Zooming to Keep Faces at a
Constant Size” is deactivated, [ ] is displayed around a detected
face, and the camera automatically zooms out when moved.
Zooming is not possible while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
Face sizes cannot be changed during movie recording.
Accessories
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming
(Seek Assist)
●
●
Appendix
To deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in
Index
Still Images
Movies
Auto Settings] ►
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in and move the camera to
look for it, the camera detects this movement and automatically zooms
out, which makes it easier to find the subject.
[Seek Assist] ► [Off].
1
2
Look for the lost subject.
● When you move the camera to look for
the subject, the camera zooms out to
help you find it.
43
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Before Use
Using the Self-Timer
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
Configure the setting.
1
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Customizing the Self-Timer
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
Choose [ ].
1
Shoot.
2
● Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
● For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
(
]
button immediately.
Accessories
Configure the setting.
● For Movies: Press the movie button.
2
Appendix
● Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
● Turn the [
] dial to choose the [Delay]
time, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
the number of [Shots], and then press the
Index
[
] button.
● Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
[
] button.
● To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
44
Shoot.
2
Before Use
●
●
For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
● As you take shots, the camera adds the
shooting date or time to the lower-right
corner of images.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the first shot. More time is required
between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.
●
When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one
as follows.
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already
have one may cause it to be printed twice.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Adding a Date Stamp
Still Images
Movies
- Use the software downloaded from the Canon website
(
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right
corner.
However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so confirm
Accessories
Configure the setting.
1
● Press the [
] button, choose [Date
Appendix
Stamp ] on the [ ] tab, and then
Index
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
45
Image Display during Playback
Before Use
Continuous Shooting
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
and only the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that
Still Images
] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
Movies
the image is part of a group, [
screen.
] is displayed in the upper left of the
In [
Camera Basics
●
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
1
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
●
[
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
the group.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back
case, images are temporarily ungrouped.
●
The following actions are not available for grouped images:
(
Shoot.
2
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
Accessories
(
to shoot continuously.
Appendix
●
●
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
Index
●
●
●
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
46
Access the setting screen.
2
Before Use
Using Face ID
● Press the [
] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Add to Registry], and then press the [
button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Personal Information
● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
a New Face], and then press the [
button.
]
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
Register face information.
3
Accessories
● Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
Registering Face ID Information
Appendix
You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
● A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
Index
Display the screen on the LCD
monitor.
1
● If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
● Open the LCD monitor to display the
47
Continue registering face
information.
6
Before Use
● After [Register?] is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
[
press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 3.
● The [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.
● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
4
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(
●
●
The flash will not fire when following step 3.
If you do not register a birthday in step 4, Babies or Children icons
(
] mode.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● To register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [Birthday], and then press the [
button.
]
●
You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the
date.
Shooting
Accessories
● When finished, press the [ ] button.
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
Appendix
Save the settings.
5
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save], and then press the [ ] button.
Index
● When you point the camera toward a
subject, the names of up to 3 registered
people will be displayed when they are
detected.
● After a message is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Yes], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Shoot.
● Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. Even if people are detected, but
their names are not displayed, the names
(up to 5 people) will be recorded in the
image.
48
Before Use
Checking and Editing Registered Information
●
People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
1
●
●
Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
● Following step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Edit Info] and press the [ ] button.
If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a person to check or edit.
2
●
If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the person to check or edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
●
●
●
Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
display, but will be recorded in the image.
Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
Check or edit the information as
needed.
3
[
] tab so that the names are not displayed.
●
If you don’t want names to be recorded in still images, choose
[Face ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, choose [Face ID], and then
choose [Off].
● To check a name or birthday, choose
[Edit Profile] by pressing the [ ][
buttons, and then press the [ ] button.
On the screen displayed, you can edit
names or birthdays as described in step 4
of “Registering Face ID Information”
]
Accessories
●
●
●
You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,
but they will be recorded in still images.
Appendix
Index
(
● To check face information, press the
][ ] buttons to choose [Face Info
List], and then press the [ ] button. To
erase face information, press the [
button on the screen displayed, press the
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the face
information to erase, and then press the
] button. After [Erase?] is displayed,
continue to be recorded in the same position as for the first shot,
[
even if subjects move.
]
[
[
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
49
Choose the face info to overwrite.
3
Before Use
●
●
Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the face info to overwrite, and then press
the [ ] button.
previously shot images will remain the same.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Some characters entered with the software may not display on
the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Register face information.
4
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Follow step 3 in “Registering Face ID
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
register the new face information.
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
filled.
● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
1
● Following step 2 in “Registering Face ID
●
●
You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
Info] and press the [ ] button.
You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, first erase
Accessories
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite.
2
Appendix
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of a person whose face info
you want to overwrite, and then press the
Index
[
] button.
● If five items of face info have already been
registered, a message will be displayed.
Choose [OK] by pressing the [ ][
]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button.
● If less than five items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
50
Erasing Registered Information
Before Use
Image Customization Features
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
1
Camera Basics
● Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
Movies
Info].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
● Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
Choose the name of the person
whose info you want to erase.
2
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of a person to erase, and then
press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
●
●
If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
Accessories
Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x
7-inch or postcard sizes.
Appendix
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display
on standard-definition televisions or similar display devices, or for
printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.
Index
Square aspect ratio.
Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits.
●
Not available in [
] mode.
51
Before Use
Changing Image Resolution (Size)
Red-Eye Correction
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on
how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see
Red-eye that occurs in flash photography can be automatically corrected
as follows.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Access the [Built-in Flash Settings]
screen.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
29).
● Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ ] tab, and then press
● The option you configured is now
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
2
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper
Size (for 4:3 Images)
● Choose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then
Accessories
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Appendix
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Index
●
Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than
eyes (if the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils,
for example).
●
Not available in [
] mode.
●
●
You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by
pressing the [ ] button and immediately pressing the [
button.
]
52
Before Use
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury
Lamps
Changing Movie Image Quality
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum
movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card,
In [
] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
● Press the [ ] button, choose [
the menu, and choose the desired option
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-
area White Balance.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
] in
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
● Press the [
] button, choose [Hg
● The option you configured is now
displayed.
Lamp Corr.] on the [ ] tab, and then
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
].
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Image
Quality
Resolution
1920 x 1080
Frame Rate
Details
For shooting in Full
HD. [ ] enables
movies with smoother
motion
60 fps
Accessories
●
After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should
set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
1920 x 1080
1280 x 720
640 x 480
30 fps
30 fps
30 fps
Appendix
For shooting in HD
Index
For shooting in
standard definition
●
●
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
cannot be changed.
●
In [
], [
], and [
] modes, black bars displayed on
the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not
recorded.
53
Before Use
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Helpful Shooting Features
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
Using the Electronic Level
Still Images
Movies
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Configure the setting.
1
An electronic level can be displayed on the screen when shooting as a
guideline to determine if the camera is level.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
Display the electronic level.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [ ] button several times to
display the electronic level.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Check the focus.
2
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnified.
Level the camera as needed.
2
Accessories
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● Level the camera so that the center of the
electronic level is green.
Appendix
Index
●
The area in focus is not magnified in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
●
●
If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
] button, and on the [ ] tab, choose [Custom Display].
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
[
Add a [ ] to [ ] or [ ] to choose the electronic level.
Tilting the camera too far forward or backward will prevent you
from using the electronic level, which will turn gray.
●
●
The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera orientation.
If your shots are not level even if you use the electronic level, try
●
Not available in [ ] mode.
●
54
Before Use
Checking for Closed Eyes
Customizing Camera Operation
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
Movies
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as follows.
[
Camera Basics
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Configure the setting.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [
] button, choose [Blink
Still Images
Movies
Detection] on the [ ] tab, and then
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [
assist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then
] button, choose [AF-
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Shoot.
2
● [ ] flashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
Still Images
Movies
Accessories
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the flash is used in low-light shots.
Appendix
●
●
When you have specified multiple shots in [ ] mode, this
function is only available for the final shot.
Access the [Built-in Flash Settings]
screen.
1
Index
A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when
you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display
● Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ ] tab, and then press
●
●
This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [
]
This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode
Configure the setting.
(
2
● Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
55
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Before Use
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
1
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Display Info]. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the desired option.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
Off
Displays only the image.
[
(
] tab, and then press the [ ] button
Detailed
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
2
●
By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase
images, by pressing the [ ] button.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Display Time]. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose the desired option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Accessories
Quick
Displays images only until you can shoot again.
Displays images for the specified time. Even while
the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by
pressing the shutter button halfway again.
2 sec., 4 sec.,
8 sec.
Appendix
Index
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Hold
Off
No image display after shots.
56
Before Use
Enjoying a Variety of Images from
Each Shot (Creative Shot)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
3
Still Images
Movies
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Enter [ ] mode.
1
unique image effects or captured using special functions
● Set the mode dial to [
].
Shoot.
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
● After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
● To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [ ] button. For full-screen display in
this state, choose an image by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, and then press
the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● To return to the original display, press the
[
] button.
●
Shooting will take some time when the flash fires, but hold the
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
●
●
Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
57
Before Use
Choosing Effects
Moving Subjects (Sports)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can choose effects for images captured in [
] mode.
Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects.
● After choosing [
dial to choose the effect.
] mode, turn the [
]
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Focus.
2
● While you are pressing the shutter button
halfway, the camera will continue to
adjust focus and image brightness where
the blue frame is displayed.
Auto
All effects
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Retro
Images resemble old photos
Monochrome
Special
Natural
Images are generated in one color
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Subdued, natural-looking images
Shoot.
3
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
●
●
●
In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
Accessories
(
Appendix
There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can
shoot again. Note that some types of memory cards may delay
your next shot even longer. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory
cards are recommended.
Index
●
Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions,
camera settings, and the zoom position.
58
Shooting under Low Light (Low Light)
Before Use
Specific Scenes
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Shoot with minimal camera and subject
shake even in low-light conditions.
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.
Enter [
] mode.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Set the mode dial to [
].
ꢀ
ꢀ
Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds
(Snow)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a shooting mode.
2
● Bright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Shoot.
3
Still Images
Movies
● Vivid shots of fireworks.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
● Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Accessories
●
●
Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
Appendix
(
Index
●
●
●
Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld NightScene)
In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
Still Images
Movies
● Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
● A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
59
Before Use
●
When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [
]
Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
[ ] mode resolution is [ ] (2304 x 1728) and cannot be changed.
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Camera Basics
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a shooting mode.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
●
In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
60
Adding Artistic Effects
Before Use
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
].
[
Still Images
Movies
● Turn the [
effect.
] dial to choose a color
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Natural
Images are natural and organic.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Art Standard
Art Vivid
Art Bold
Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Choose [ ].
1
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
].
Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
[
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Art Embossed
Shoot.
2
● Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
Accessories
●
●
Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
Appendix
Index
If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
●
●
Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
61
Before Use
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [ ].
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
].
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [ ].
1
Choose an effect level.
2
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
● Turn the [
] dial to choose an effect
].
level.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
● A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
Choose the area to keep in focus.
2
Shoot.
3
● Press the [ ] button.
●
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
● Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and press the [ ][ ] buttons to move it.
desired results.
Accessories
Appendix
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
3
Index
● Turn the [
] dial to choose the speed.
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
4
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
62
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Before Use
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Speed
Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [ ].
1
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
].
●
●
The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Choose a color tone.
2
● Turn the [
] dial to choose a color
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
tone.
●
To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][
buttons in step 2. To move the frame, press the [ ][ ] buttons
again. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the
]
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
[
][ ] buttons.
Shoot.
●
●
Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
3
Standard
Warm
Shots resemble toy camera images.
Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [
] and [ ] at
Accessories
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
an aspect ratio of [
be changed.
Cool
Appendix
●
The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button on the
screens in steps 2 and 3, or while shooting movies.
Index
●
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
63
Before Use
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Shooting in Monochrome
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
Choose [ ].
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [ ].
1
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Image Effects
].
].
[
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a color tone.
2
Choose an effect level.
2
● Turn the [
tone.
] dial to choose a color
● Turn the [
] dial to choose an effect
level.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Shoot.
3
Shoot.
3
B/W
Black and white shots.
Sepia tone shots.
Sepia
Blue
●
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
Blue and white shots.
desired results.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
64
Before Use
●
●
You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face
the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are
visible.
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter)
Camera Basics
available for the final shot.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Automatic shooting is not available while you are holding down
the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Using the Wink Self-Timer
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
Still Images
Movies
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way
down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
Choose [ ].
1
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Choose [ ].
(
1
press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
(
press the [ ] button.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
2
Aim the camera at a person.
2
Appendix
● Each time the camera detects a smile, it
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will
wink.
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
Index
● To pause smile detection, press the [
button. Press the [ ] button again to
resume detection.
]
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
3
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
●
Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera
will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
65
Using the Face Self-Timer
Face the camera and wink.
4
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
● The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
83). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots.
(
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
Camera Basics
[
] button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [ ].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
●
●
If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat,
or glasses.
press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
●
●
●
Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as
a wink.
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
2
If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds
later.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
available for the final shot.
●
●
If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person
enters the shooting area and winks.
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
3
The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
Accessories
Appendix
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
Index
Join the subjects in the shooting
area and look at the camera.
4
● After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
66
Before Use
●
●
Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons
Shooting Various Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Movies
available for the final shot.
●
The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [ ] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
Shooting Movies in Movie Mode
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the settings to suit the
2
Shoot.
3
● Press the movie button.
Accessories
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Appendix
Index
67
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting
Before Use
Sound Settings
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-stop
increments within a range of −2 to +2 stops.
Still Images
Movies
Adjusting the Recording Volume
Lock the exposure.
1
Camera Basics
Although the recording level (volume) is automatically adjusted to reduce
distortion, you can set the level manually to suit the shooting scene.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● While holding the shutter button halfway
down, press the [ ] button to lock the
exposure. [ ] is displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the [Sound rec.] screen.
1
● To unlock the exposure, press the [
]
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Sound rec.] on the [ ] tab, and then
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
button again.
Adjust the exposure.
2
● Turn the [
] dial to adjust the
Configure the setting.
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
exposure, as you watch the screen.
● Choose [Sound rec.], and then choose
Shoot.
3
● Press the [ ] button, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to configure the [Level]
●
●
To make the sound of the [
] dial quieter while you are
setting.
recording a movie, press the [ ][ ] buttons and adjust the setting.
You can switch between adjusting the exposure compensation
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Auto].
you press the [ ] button. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to configure
Accessories
these settings.
Appendix
Index
68
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Before Use
Shooting iFrame Movies
Reduce audio distortion from strong wind. (To ensure natural sound, do
not use unless there is wind.) In this case, you can deactivate the wind
filter.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Shoot movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices. You can quickly edit, save, and manage your iFrame movies
● Access the [Sound rec.] screen as
described in step 1 of “Adjusting the
Recording Volume”.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [ ].
● Choose [Wind filter/Attenuator], and then
press the [ ] button.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Choose [Wind Filter], and then choose
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
Using the Attenuator
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
The attenuator can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments.
However, in quiet environments, it lowers the sound-recording level.
2
● Access the [Sound rec.] screen as
described in step 1 of “Adjusting the
Recording Volume”.
● Press the movie button.
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
● Choose [Wind filter/Attenuator], and then
press the [ ] button.
●
●
The resolution is [
● Choose [Attenuator], and then choose
Accessories
iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
Appendix
Index
69
Before Use
Shooting Super Slow Motion Movies
●
●
Zooming is not available during recording, even if you move the
zoom lever.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Focus, exposure, and color are determined when you press the
movie button.
You can shoot fast-moving subjects for playback later in slow motion. Note
that sound is not recorded.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [ ].
1
●
●
motion.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
You can change the playback speed of movies by using the
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a frame rate.
2
● Press the [ ] button, choose [
the menu, and choose the desired frame
] in
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● The option you configured is now
displayed.
3
● Press the movie button.
● A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed. Maximum clip length is approx.
30 sec.
Accessories
Appendix
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Index
Playback Time
(For a 30-sec. Clip)
Frame Rate
Image Quality
240 fps
120 fps
(320 x 240)
(640 x 480)
Approx. 4 min.
Approx. 2 min.
70
Before Use
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
4
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Enter [ ] mode.
1
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
Customize the settings as desired
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set
to [ ] mode.
(
● [ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
which may enable adequate exposure.
Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than
[
recording.
(
Accessories
Appendix
Index
71
Compose the shot and shoot.
2
Before Use
Image Brightness (Exposure)
● After one shot, AE is unlocked and [ ] is
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
no longer displayed.
●
●
AE: Auto Exposure
After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Camera Basics
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
(Program Shift).
] dial
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –3 to +3.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the Metering Method
● Press the [ ] button. As you watch the
screen, turn the [
] dial to adjust
Still Images
Movies
brightness, and then press the [ ] button
again when finished.
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● The correction level you specified is now
displayed.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
29).
● The option you configured is now
displayed.
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Accessories
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Appendix
Evaluative
Lock the exposure.
1
Index
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[
] button.
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point
frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to
Spot
● [ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
● To unlock AE, release the shutter button
and press the [ ] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
72
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Before Use
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Set the metering method to [ ].
1
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[
].
Camera Basics
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an ISO speed.
]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
[
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
2
● The option you configured is now
displayed.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Spot
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
AE Point] on the [ ] tab, and then
Automatically adjusts the ISO
speed to suit the shooting mode
and conditions.
● The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
AUTO
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(
For shooting outdoors
in fair weather.
100, 125, 160, 200
250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800
Low
●
For shooting in
Slightly
cloudy conditions, or
Low
at twilight.
For shooting night
scenes, or in dark
rooms.
Slightly
High
1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200
Accessories
Appendix
●
If motion blur is not reduced enough at an ISO speed of [3200],
Index
or [6400].
73
Before Use
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO NR)
●
●
To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
● Press the [
] button, choose [High
●
Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the flash
range. However, shots may look grainy.
ISO NR] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified
in a range of [400] – [3200], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of
three levels.
●
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Access the setting screen.
1
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
● Press the [
] button, choose [ISO
Auto Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-
stop increments.
Configure the setting.
2
Accessories
● Choose a menu item to configure, and
Appendix
Choose [ ].
1
Index
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
●
You can also access the [ISO Auto Settings] screen when the
[
] button.
74
Configure the setting.
2
Before Use
●
● Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [
] dial.
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)
Still Images
Movies
Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out,
as follows.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
29).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●
●
specified for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
the [
] button when the exposure compensation screen
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [
Available ISO Speed
Options
Details
(
(
●
●
]
–
(
Automatic adjustment to prevent
washed-out highlights
[AUTO], [100] – [3200]
[AUTO], [200] – [3200]
[AUTO], [400] – [3200]
for the final shot.
Tone down highlights by about 200%
relative to the brightness level of [ ].
Accessories
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Tone down highlights by about 400%
relative to the brightness level of [ ].
Appendix
Still Images
Movies
Index
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness.
To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To
preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct.
●
supported range if you have specified a value outside the
supported range indicated here.
●
Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
75
Shadow Correct
Before Use
Image Colors
Still Images
Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adjusting White Balance
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
29).
● The option you configured is now
displayed.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Auto
Day Light
Shade
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
For shooting in the shade.
Accessories
Cloudy
For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting.
For shooting under white fluorescent lighting.
Appendix
Tungsten
Fluorescent
Index
Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight fluorescent lighting.
Flash
For shooting with the flash.
For manually setting a custom white balance
Custom
(
76
Custom White Balance
Configure advanced settings.
2
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
● To configure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust the
correction level by turning the [ ] dial
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
or pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To reset the correction level, press the
Camera Basics
[
] button.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
].
● Press the [
] button to complete
[
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
the setting.
● Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if
you switch to another white balance option (by following steps in
● The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
reset if you record custom white balance data.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
●
●
B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7
mireds on a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion filter
density)
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color-
compensating filter.
Accessories
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Appendix
Configure the setting.
1
Still Images
Movies
Index
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
● Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the
correction level for B and A.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
(
29).
● The option you configured is now
displayed.
77
Custom Color
Before Use
–
My Colors Off
Vivid
Still Images
Movies
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
Neutral
Access the setting screen.
1
Camera Basics
Sepia
B/W
Creates sepia tone images.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Creates black and white images.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet
natural-looking colors resembling images on
positive film.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Positive Film
Configure the setting.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then specify the value by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Lighter Skin Tone
Darker Skin Tone
Lightens skin tones.
Darkens skin tones.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes
mountains, foliage, and other green subjects
more vivid.
Vivid Green
● Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Vivid Red
Accessories
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
Custom Color
Appendix
Index
●
●
With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
78
Before Use
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Shooting Range and Focusing
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
Choose [ ].
1
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][
]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
] button.
buttons to choose [
the [ ] button.
], and then press
[
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
● [
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Specify the general focal position.
2
● Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
bar (1, which shows the distance and
focal position) and the magnified display
area, press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify
the general focal position.
●
●
●
If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
Be careful to avoid damaging the lens.
In the yellow bar display area below the zoom bar, [ ] will turn
gray and the camera will not focus.
Accessories
● To adjust the magnification, press the [
button.
● To move the magnified display area,
press the [ ] button and then the
]
(1)
●
To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
Appendix
Index
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen.
Fine-tune the focus.
3
● Press the shutter button halfway to have
the camera fine-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
79
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Before Use
●
●
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
settings cannot be changed.
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specified focus can be set in three levels.
(
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [ ].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
●
●
●
To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
You can enlarge or hide the magnified display area by adjusting
To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button
[Safety MF] ► [Off].
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
2
● Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
or turning the [
] dial.
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
Accessories
●
●
Access the setting screen.
1
Appendix
● Press the [
] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ ] tab, press
the [ ] button, choose [Peaking], and
Index
●
You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
[
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
(
●
●
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [
]
Configure the setting.
2
(
● Choose a menu item to configure, and
for the final shot.
●
Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
80
Before Use
Storing the Zoom or Focal Position
Digital Tele-Converter
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Zoom positions set with the zoom lever or focal positions set manually are
normally reset once you turn the camera off, but they can also be stored
on the camera.
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Storing the Zoom Position
Auto Mode /
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [
[Recall Zoom/MF Settings] on the
] tab, press the [ ] button, and then
] button, choose
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
[
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom
(
Storing the Focal Position
The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [ ] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
● Choose [MF Memory], and then choose
Accessories
Appendix
Index
●
81
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (FlexiZone)
Before Use
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
Prepare to move the AF frame.
1
● Press the [
] button, choose [AF
Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Press the [ ] button. The AF frame
turns orange.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Move and resize the AF frame.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Turn the [
] dial to move the AF
frame, or press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
to move it by a smaller amount.
● To return the AF frame to the original
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
FlexiZone/Center
position in the center, keep the [
button held down.
]
Still Images
Movies
● To reduce the AF frame size, press the
] button. Press it again to restore
One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing.
[
it to the original size.
●
A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
Finish the setup process.
3
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● Press the [ ] button.
Accessories
●
●
AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
Appendix
●
To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
Index
You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame
(
●
The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
82
Face Detect
Choose a subject to focus on.
2
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
● Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other
detected faces.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the
subject moves, the camera will continue
to track the subject within a certain range.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
● If no subject is detected, [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel tracking, press the [ ] button
again.
●
●
If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), an AF frame is displayed in the center of
the screen when you press the shutter button halfway.
Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
● Press the shutter button halfway. [
]
changes to a blue [ ], which follows
the subject as the camera continues to
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden
The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
(
●
●
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Accessories
● Even after your shot, [ ] is still displayed
and the camera continues to track the
subject.
Appendix
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Still Images
Index
Movies
●
●
Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches
that of the background too closely.
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
Choose [Tracking AF].
1
●
[Tracking AF].
● [ ] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
83
Before Use
Changing the Focus Setting
●
●
The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter
button halfway without pressing the [ ] button. After your shot,
] is displayed in the center of the screen.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
Still Images
Movies
If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered
people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
Camera Basics
chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected with Face
ID.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [
[Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then
] button, choose
Shooting with Servo AF
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the
shutter button halfway.
Configure the setting.
1
On
Off
● Press the [
] button, choose [Servo
AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On]
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus
constantly.
(
Focus.
2
Accessories
● The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed while
you are pressing the shutter button halfway.
Appendix
●
●
Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specified AF frame mode.
Index
●
If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
●
●
●
AF lock shooting is not available.
84
Before Use
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
●
When [Face ID] is set to [On], names of any registered people
detected are not displayed when you have selected another,
unregistered face to focus on. However, their names will be
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on.
Prepare the camera for Face Select.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Set the AF frame to [Face Detect]
Shooting with the AF Lock
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
Still Images
Movies
Enter Face Select mode.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.
● Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button.
Lock the focus.
● After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [ ] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
1
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
● Even if the subject moves, the face frame
● The focus is now locked, and [
the MF indicator are displayed.
] and
[
] follows the subject within a certain
range.
● To unlock the focus, after you release
the shutter button, press the [ ] button
again, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose [ ].
● If a face is not detected, [ ] is not
displayed.
Choose the face to focus on.
3
Accessories
● To switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the [ ] button.
Compose the shot and shoot.
2
Appendix
● After you have switched the face frame
to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off]
is displayed, and the specified AF frame
mode screen is displayed again.
Index
Shoot.
4
● Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
85
Before Use
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the
Subject in Focus
Flash
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Changing the Flash Mode
Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
Configure the setting.
1
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Lift the flash.
1
2
● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Configure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][
buttons to choose a flash mode, and then
press the [ ] button.
]
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
2
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
● The option you configured is now
to shoot continuously.
displayed.
● The images are managed together as a
●
●
The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [
]
button when the flash is lowered. Lift the flash with your finger in
advance.
●
Accessories
If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
●
●
Appendix
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
Auto
Index
●
●
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
86
Slow Synchro
Before Use
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.
Still Images
Movies
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
●
●
In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
● Raise the flash, press the [ ] button and
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
immediately turn the [
] dial to choose
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.
● The correction level you specified is now
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
displayed.
Off
For shooting without the flash.
●
When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots
to reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still.
choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off].
●
●
You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by
Control] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] MENU screen
Accessories
mounted).
(
Appendix
- When the flash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
Index
87
Before Use
Shooting with the FE Lock
Changing the Flash Timing
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows.
shots.
Access the setting screen.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Lift the flash and set the flash to [ ]
1
● Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Control] on the [ ] tab, and then press
Lock the flash exposure.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
2
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
● Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[
] button.
● The flash fires, and when
] is displayed, the flash output level is
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
1st-curtain
The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens.
[
2nd-curtain The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes.
retained.
● To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the [ ] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
Compose the shot and shoot.
3
Accessories
● After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
Appendix
●
FE: Flash Exposure
Index
88
Before Use
●
●
When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
Shooting RAW Images
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no
loss of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
with minimal loss of image quality.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
●
The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
(
29).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
RAW images is .CR2.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera
for optimal image quality and compressed to reduce file size.
However, the compression process is irreversible, and images
cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed state. Image
processing may also cause some loss of image quality.
Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed)
data, recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the
camera’s image processing. The data cannot be used in this
state for viewing on a computer or printing. You must first use the
software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary
JPEG or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of
image quality.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
For details on resolution and the number of shots that will fit on a
Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for
each shot.
The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without
using the software.
89
Before Use
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Other Settings
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)
Access the setting screen.
1
● Press the [
] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can
Hybrid Auto Mode
Configure the setting.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
● Choose [IS Mode], and then choose the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
29).
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Continuous
Image stabilization is active only at the moment of
shooting.
Shoot Only*
Off
Deactivates image stabilization.
* The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
●
If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
Accessories
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
Appendix
Index
90
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size
Shown before Shooting
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera
shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can
choose not to reduce significant camera shake.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[IS Settings] screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
91
Before Use
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
5
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for
your shooting style
Enter [ ] mode.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1
● Set the mode dial to [
].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Set the shutter speed.
2
● Turn the [
] dial to set the shutter
speed.
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective
mode.
●
In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
●
●
●
When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
Accessories
With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [
and cannot be changed.
]
Appendix
Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter
Index
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
●
[
]: Time value
92
Before Use
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Specific Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values ([M] Mode)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Enter [
] mode.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
1
● Set the mode dial to [
].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Enter [ ] mode.
1
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
Configure the setting.
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Set the aperture value.
2
● Press the [ ] button, choose adjustment
of shutter speed (1) or aperture value (2),
● Turn the [
] dial to set the aperture
and turn the [
] dial to specify a value.
value.
● An exposure level mark (4) based on
your specified value is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison to
the standard exposure level (3).
●
Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
( )
2
( )
1
● [ ] or [ ] is displayed when the difference
from standard exposure exceeds 2 stops.
( )
3
Accessories
Appendix
( )
4
●
●
[
]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the
lens)
Index
To avoid exposure problems in [
] and [
] modes, you
can have the camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or
aperture value, even when standard exposure cannot otherwise
be obtained. Press the [
] button and set [Safety Shift] on
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.
93
Before Use
Adjusting the Flash Output
●
●
After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
Screen brightness may change depending on your specified
shutter speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [ ].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Choose from the three flash levels in [ ] mode.
●
With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [
and cannot be changed.
]
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Specify the flash mode.
2
●
●
[
]: Manual
● Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified
Control] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
● In [Flash Mode], choose [Manual]
(
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
3
● Raise the flash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the flash level, and then press the [
]
button.
● Once the setting is complete, the flash
output level is displayed.
Accessories
[
]: Minimum, [
]: Medium, [
]:
Maximum
Appendix
●
●
and choosing [ ] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Flash Output].
You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] MENU screen
Index
(
mounted).
- When the flash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
94
Changing Settings during Recording
Before Use
Recording Movies at Specific Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values
Settings can also be adjusted while you are recording a movie, by
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
recorded in the movie.
Set your preferred shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
Camera Basics
●
●
To make the sound of the [
] dial quieter, press the [ ][
]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
buttons and adjust the setting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
You can switch between adjusting the shutter speed, aperture
Enter [ ] mode.
1
recording each time you press the [ ] button. Press the [ ][
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
buttons to configure these settings.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
2
● Press the [ ] button to choose shutter
speed, aperture value, or ISO speed,
and then turn the [
a value.
] dial to choose
Accessories
●
Some shutter speeds may cause flickering on the screen when
recording under fluorescent or LED lighting, which may be recorded.
Appendix
Index
●
●
With [ ], the exposure level mark moves when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, showing the difference from the standard
exposure level.
With settings other than [ ], an exposure level mark based on
your specified shutter speed and aperture value is shown for
comparison to the standard exposure level.
95
Before Use
●
●
Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway
and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings
screen.
Customization for Shooting Styles
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Grayed-out items can also be specified, but they may not be
displayed in some shooting modes.
Customizing Display Information
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
●
Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
displayed in each display when the [ ] button is pressed in shooting
screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Assigning Functions to Buttons
Access the setting screen.
1
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Custom Display] on the [ ] tab, and
Still Images
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the [
button, movie button ( button), or [ ] button.
Movies
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
]
Access the setting screen.
1
Configure the setting.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Set
2
Shortcut button], [Set
button] on the [ ] tab, and then
button] or [Set
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item, and then press the [ ] button.
Items you choose for display are labeled
with [ ].
Accessories
Configure the setting.
2
● Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will
be included in display.
Appendix
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a function to assign, and then press the
Shooting Info
Grid Lines
[
] button.
Index
Displays a reference grid.
Use the assigned function as
needed.
3
Electronic Level
], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes.
], [
],
Histogram
● To activate an assigned function, press
the button you assigned it to.
[
96
Before Use
●
●
●
To restore default settings, choose [ ] in [Set Shortcut button],
] in [Set button], and [ ] in [Set button].
Customizing the FUNC. Menu
(FUNC. Menu Layout)
[
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
With [ ] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records
The display of FUNC. menu items can be customized. Functions not
shown on this menu will be available on the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
Camera Basics
changes to [ ] or [ ].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
●
With [
], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks
] is then displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
the focus. [
With [ ], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen
display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
- Press any button other than the power button
- Hold the camera in another orientation
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Access the setting screen.
1
- Raise or lower the flash
● Press the [
] button, choose
●
You can still record movies in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even
if you assign a function to the movie button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[FUNC. Menu Layout] on the [ ] tab,
Choose icons to include in the
menu.
2
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons and press
the [ ] button to choose icons to include
in the FUNC. menu. Selected icons are
marked with a [ ].
Accessories
Appendix
● Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will
be included in display.
Index
● Items without a [ ] will be available on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
Configure the setting.
3
● Press the [
] button, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
97
Before Use
Saving Shooting Settings
●
●
The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
] button when the FUNC. menu is displayed.
Items that you remove from the FUNC. menu, add to My Menu
[
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ] or [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you
switch shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings)
can be retained this way.
Movies
(
removed from My Menu.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Rearranging Menu Items
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Settings that can be saved
Access the setting screen.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
● Shooting mode ([ ], [
], [
], or [ ])
press the [ ] button.
● Items set in [ ], [
● Shooting menu settings
● Zoom positions
], [
● Press the [ ] or [ ] button to choose an
icon to move. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose the new position, and then
press the [ ] or [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
2
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
1
● Press the [
] button, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Configure the setting.
2
● Press the [
] button, choose [Save
Appendix
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Index
Save the settings.
3
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination, and then press the [
button.
]
98
Before Use
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
●
●
To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [
or [ ], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These
setting details are not applied in other shooting modes.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
You can save up to five commonly used shooting menu items on the [
tab. By customizing the [ ] tab, you can access to these items quickly
from a single screen.
]
To clear information you have saved to [
default values, turn the mode dial to [
] or [
] or [
] and restore
] and choose
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the setting screen.
1
● Press the [
] button, choose [My
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Menu settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select items], and then press the [
button.
]
● Choose up to five menu items to save by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
press the [ ] button.
Accessories
● [ ] is displayed.
Appendix
● To cancel saving, press the [ ] button.
[
] is no longer displayed.
Index
● Press the [ ] button.
99
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
3
Before Use
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[Sort], and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose a menu item to move by pressing
the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the
[
] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to change the
order, and then press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the
[
] button in Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes].
Accessories
Appendix
Index
100
Before Use
Viewing
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
6
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Enter Playback mode.
1
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [
] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
] button to
Browse through your images.
2
enter Playback mode.
● To view the previous image, press the [
button. To view the next image, press the
] button.
]
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
[
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
Accessories
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons
for at least one second. In this mode,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse
through images.
Appendix
Index
● To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
● To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
101
Before Use
● Movies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
] icon.
Switching Display Modes
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will deactivate
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Play movies.
the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the camera body) to
3
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● To start playback, press the [ ] button to
access the movie control panel, press the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button again.
No Information Display
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Adjust the volume.
4
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
● To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons.
Pause playback.
5
(1)
Accessories
● To pause or resume playback, press the
] button.
[
Appendix
● After the movie is finished, [
] is
displayed.
Index
●
●
●
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
RGB Histogram, GPS Information
Display
] tab
► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].
To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
] tab ► [Resume] ►
[Last shot].
●
Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
●
To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
30) and choose your desired effect on the [
] tab ►
[Transition Effect].
102
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Before Use
● Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
Movies
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
(
in the GPS information display.
Histogram
● Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● The graph in detailed information display
(
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
●
[---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
● The histogram can also be accessed
GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
Still Images
Movies
● The RGB histogram (1) shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
( )
1
103
Viewing by Date
Before Use
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose a movie.
1
Still Images
Movies
● Press the [
Play Digest Movies] on the [
] button, choose [List/
] tab, and
day of still image shooting as follows.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose an image.
1
Play the movie.
2
● Still images shot in [ ] mode are
● Press the [ ] button to start playback.
labeled with an [
● Choose a still image labeled with
] and press the [ ] button.
] icon.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Checking People Detected in Face ID
[
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Play the movie.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK]
will be displayed.
(
● Press the [ ] button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image.
● The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
Accessories
● Names will be displayed on detected
people.
●
After a moment, [
] will no longer be displayed when
Appendix
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(
Index
●
If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
] tab ► [Face ID Info]
► [Name Display] ► [Off].
104
Before Use
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions
Browsing and Filtering Images
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect
Navigating through Images in an Index
(
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Name
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images
People
Date
Displays images with detected faces.
you are looking for.
Displays the images shot on a specific date.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Display images in an index.
1
Favorites
● Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
Displays only still images or movies.
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [
Still image/
Movie
]
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
Choose [Image Search].
1
● Press the [
] button, and then
] tab
Choose an image.
choose [Image Search] on the [
2
(
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
Accessories
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
Appendix
● Press the [ ] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
Choose the first condition for image
display or navigation.
2
Index
● When [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. To perform
an action for all of these images together,
press the [ ] button and go to step 3.
●
To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[
] tab ► [Index
Effect] ► [Off].
105
Choose the second condition and
check the images found.
3
Before Use
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● To switch to filtered image display, press
the [ ] button and go to step 4.
Jump to Favorites
Jump Shot Date
● When you have selected [ ] as the first
condition, press the [ ] button, and press
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the next
screen to choose a person.
Jumps to the first image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Jump 10 Images
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
View the filtered images.
4
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
Choose a condition.
1
● Choose a condition (or jump method)
in single-image display by turning the
● To cancel filtered display, press the [
]
[
] dial and then pressing the [ ][
]
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
button.
buttons.
●
When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
View images matching your
specified condition, or jump by the
specified amount.
conditions, those conditions will not be available. Note that [ ] is
2
● Turn the [
] dial to view only images
●
●
To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 3.
Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
matching the condition or jump by the
specified number of images forward or
back.
Accessories
Appendix
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
●
Turning the [
] dial when browsing images in index display
will jump to the previous or next image according to the jump
method chosen in single-image display. However, if you have
chosen [ ] or [ ], the jump method will be switched to [ ].
Index
●
found are no longer shown.
106
Before Use
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Editing Face ID Information
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
]
individually.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose a grouped image.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
Changing Names
image labeled with [
press the [ ] button.
], and then
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Access the setting screen.
1
● Press the [
] button and choose
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[Face ID Info] on the [
View images in the group
individually.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Edit
ID Info], and then press the [ ] button.
● Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons will display
only images in the group.
● Pressing the [ ] button will display
[Display all images]. Press [ ] to cancel
group playback.
Choose an image.
2
choose an image and press the [
button.
Accessories
]
●
During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images
Appendix
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [ ][
buttons to choose the name to change,
and press the [ ] button.
Index
]
●
●
To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still
Choose the editing option.
3
] tab ► [Group Images]
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Overwrite], and then press the [
button.
► [Off]. However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during
]
individual playback.
In [
] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying
only shown immediately after you shoot.
107
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
4
Before Use
Image Viewing Options
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
Magnifying Images
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Erasing Names
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Magnify an image.
1
● Following step 3 in “Changing Names”
● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image, and
] is displayed. You can magnify
images up to about 10x by continuing to
hold the zoom lever.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
[
] button.
[
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
[
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
● To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [ ]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
( )
1
2
Accessories
● To move the display position, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
Appendix
● While [
] is displayed, you can switch
] by pressing the [ ] button. To
switch to other images while zoomed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons. Press the
to [
Index
[
] button again to restore the original
setting.
●
You can return to single-image display from magnified display by
pressing the [ ] button.
108
Changing Slideshow Settings
Before Use
Viewing Slideshows
You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions
between images and the display duration of each image.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
Access the setting screen.
1
● Press the [
] button, and then
Access the setting screen.
1
Camera Basics
choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
] tab
(
Configure the settings.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Choose a menu item to configure, and
● To start the slideshow with your settings,
choose [Start] and press the [ ] button.
Configure the setting.
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Choose a menu item to configure, and
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Start automatic playback.
3
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Start], and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
● The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
Appendix
● Press the [
slideshow.
] button to stop the
Index
●
during slideshows.
●
●
To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the [ ][
]
buttons down.
109
Before Use
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle)
Protecting Images
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in
many kinds of scenes.
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera
(
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choosing a Selection Method
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose Smart Shuffle.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Access the setting screen.
1
● Press the [
] button, choose [Smart
] tab, and then press
Shuffle] on the [
● Press the [
[Protect] on the [
] button and choose
● Four candidate images are displayed.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose an image.
2
Choose a selection method.
2
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the image you want to view next.
● Choose a menu item and an option as
● Your chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
Accessories
] button.
● For full-screen display of the center
image, press the [ ] button. To restore
the original display, press the [ ] button
again.
Appendix
●
●
Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
Index
● Press the [
] button to restore
single-image display.
Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection.
●
Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
110
Before Use
Choosing Images Individually
Selecting a Range
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Select].
Choose [Select Range].
1
1
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
press the [ ] button.
Range] and press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose an image.
Choose a starting image.
2
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Repeat this process to specify other
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
images.
Protect the image.
3
● Press the [
message is displayed.
] button. A confirmation
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Choose an ending image.
3
Appendix
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
●
Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
Index
turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● Images before the first image cannot be
selected as the last image.
111
Protect the images.
4
Before Use
Erasing Images
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose an image to erase.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
1
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Erase the image.
2
Protecting All Images at Once
● Press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and
Choose [Protect All Images].
1
then press the [ ] button.
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [ ][
buttons to choose [Cancel], and then
press the [ ] button.
Images] and press the [ ] button.
]
Protect the images.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
Accessories
and then press the [ ] button.
●
Pressing the [ ] button while [ ] images are displayed will give
you the option of choosing [Erase ], [Erase
for deletion.
], or [Erase
]
Appendix
Index
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
112
Choose an image.
2
Before Use
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
● Once you choose an image following
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
(
● To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Camera Basics
Choosing a Selection Method
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the setting screen.
1
Erase the image.
3
● Press the [
] button, and then
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [
] button. A confirmation
choose [Erase] on the [
message is displayed.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose a selection method.
2
Selecting a Range
● Choose a menu item and an option as
Choose [Select Range].
1
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
selection method, and then press the [
button.
]
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Accessories
Range] and press the [ ] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Choose images.
Appendix
2
Choosing Images Individually
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
Index
(
Choose [Select].
1
Erase the images.
3
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
press the [ ] button.
113
Specifying All Images at Once
Before Use
Rotating Images
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Select All Images].
1
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
Images] and press the [ ] button.
Choose [Rotate].
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Erase the images.
● Press the [
] button and choose
2
Auto Mode /
[Rotate] on the [
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Rotate the image.
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
● The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [ ] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
●
Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
Accessories
(
Appendix
Index
114
Before Use
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Tagging Images as Favorites
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
● Press the [
Rotate] on the [
] button, choose [Auto
] tab, and then choose
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [Favorites].
1
● Press the [
] button and choose
●
●
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
[Favorites] on the [
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and
rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
Choose an image.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
[
] is displayed.
● To untag the image, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Appendix
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
Index
Finish the setup process.
3
● Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
115
Before Use
●
●
Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in
step 3.
Editing Still Images
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
memory card has sufficient free space.
Favorite images will have a three-star rating (
)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7.
(Does not apply to movies or RAW images.)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Resizing Images
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.
Choose [Resize].
1
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Press the [
[Resize] on the [
] button and choose
Choose an image.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
Choose an image size.
3
Accessories
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
size, and then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
● [Save new image?] is displayed.
Index
Save the new image.
4
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a new file.
116
Review the new image.
( )
1
( )
2
( )
3
Adjust the cropping area.
5
3
Before Use
● Press the [
] button. [Display new
● A frame is displayed around the portion of
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
image?] is displayed.
the image to be cropped (1).
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped (2) is shown in the lower right.
You can also see the resolution after
cropping (3).
● The saved image is now displayed.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
●
●
Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [
]
● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
RAW images cannot be edited.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To change the frame orientation, press
the [ ] button.
●
Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image.
Cropping
To crop the image based on this frame,
turn the [
frame.
] dial to switch to the other
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.
● Press the [
] button.
Choose [Cropping].
1
Save as a new image and review.
Accessories
4
● Press the [
] button, and then
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab
Appendix
(
(
Index
Choose an image.
●
●
Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [
]
2
(
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
RAW images cannot be edited.
●
●
●
Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio
after cropping.
Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped
images.
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
117
Before Use
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate file.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [My Colors].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [
] button, and then
] tab
Choose [i-Contrast].
1
choose [My Colors] on the [
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [
] tab
Choose an image.
(
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose an image.
2
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
Choose an option.
3
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
Choose an option.
3
option, and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
Save as a new image and review.
4
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
Save as a new image and review.
Accessories
4
(
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
Appendix
(
●
●
Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
Index
●
For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.
●
●
Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
RAW images cannot be edited this way.
●
The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
●
If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
118
Before Use
Correcting Red-Eye
●
●
Some images may not be corrected accurately.
To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate file.
●
●
●
Protected images cannot be overwritten.
RAW images cannot be edited this way.
Camera Basics
Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in [ ],
but the original image cannot be overwritten.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose an image.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Correct the image.
3
● Press the [ ] button.
● Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
● Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Accessories
Appendix
Save as a new image and review.
4
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[New File], and then press the [ ] button.
Index
● The image is now saved as a new file.
● Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
119
Review the edited movie.
3
Before Use
Editing Movies
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. The edited
movie is now played.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end
● To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
● To cancel editing, press the [
]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
Choose [ ].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(
]
Save the edited movie.
4
button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[New File], and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
( )
1
Specify portions to cut.
2
● (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
● Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [
or [ ].
]
● The movie is now saved as a new file.
● To view the portions you can cut
(identified by [ ] on the screen), press
the [ ][ ] buttons to move [ ]. Cut the
beginning of the movie (from [ ]) by
choosing [ ], and cut the end of the
movie by choosing [ ].
Accessories
( )
2
Appendix
●
To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
● If you move [ ] to a position other than a
Index
[
] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
●
●
●
If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
[
] mark on the right will be cut.
When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
120
Before Use
Reducing File Sizes
Editing Digest Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
Movies
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Select the clip to erase.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
play a movie created in [ ] mode, and
then press the [ ] button to access the
movie control panel.
●
●
●
Compressed movies are saved in [
] movies cannot be compressed.
] format.
[
Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ] or
[
], and then press the [ ] button.
Choose [ ].
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
Accessories
Confirm erasure.
3
Appendix
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Index
● The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
●
[
] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
121
Before Use
Available Wi-Fi Features
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
7
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Computer
Wi-Fi Functions
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible
devices, and use the camera with Web services
● Web Services
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to send
camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can
also be sent automatically to a computer or Web service via CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY.
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
Accessories
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras.
Appendix
Index
122
Before Use
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button
Sending Images to a Smartphone
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ]
button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for
viewing and saving camera images on connected devices.
Connect the camera to a smartphone and send images in either of these
ways.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplifies
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button.
Install CameraWindow.
1
Hybrid Auto Mode
● For an NFC-compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later),
activating NFC and touching the
smartphone against the camera’s
N-Mark ( ) will start Google Play on the
smartphone. Once the CameraWindow
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
CameraWindow app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● For other Android smartphones, find
CameraWindow in Google Play and
download and install the app.
●
No matter how you connect the devices, you can also use the
● For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, find
CameraWindow in the App Store and
download and install the app.
Accessories
Press the [ ] button.
2
Appendix
● Press the [ ] button.
Index
● When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
(
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
123
Choose [ ].
Choose a smartphone to connect to.
3
6
Before Use
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
and then press the [ ] button.
smartphone, and then press the [
button.
]
● After a connection is established with
the smartphone, the smartphone name
is displayed on the camera. (This screen
will close in about one minute.)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Import images.
7
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Use the smartphone to import images
from the camera to the smartphone.
● Use the smartphone to end the
connection; the camera will automatically
turn off.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
4
●
When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
● In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
Start CameraWindow.
5
Accessories
● For an NFC-compatible Android
smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later),
activating NFC and touching the
Appendix
smartphone against the camera’s N-Mark
Index
(
) will start CameraWindow on the
smartphone.
● For other smartphones, start
CameraWindow on the smartphone.
● After the camera recognizes the
smartphone, a device selection screen is
displayed.
124
Choose [ ].
3
Before Use
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
For better security, you can require password input on the screen
Camera Basics
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] ► [On]. In this case, in the
password field on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [Add a Device].
4
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
●
●
One smartphone can be registered to the [ ] button. To assign
] tab ► [Mobile Device Connect Button].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
● Choose a smartphone to connect to, as
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
Install CameraWindow.
1
Adjust the privacy setting.
5
Accessories
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes],
and then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
smartphone.
● You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
Index
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
2
● Press the [
] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [ ] button.
● If a screen requesting the device
nickname is displayed, enter the
125
Send images.
6
Before Use
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
Camera Basics
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
the [
] button.
●
●
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 6.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Using Another Access Point
● To cancel the connection, press the
[
on the confirmation screen to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button. You
can also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or
through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point.
Prepare for the connection.
1
● Access the [Waiting to connect] screen.
● To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedures starting from step 1.
Accessories
Appendix
●
●
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 5.
Index
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
2
Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
126
Choose [Switch Network].
3
Before Use
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Switch Network], and then press the [
button.
● A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
Saving Images to a Computer
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Preparing to Register a Computer
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
4
Checking Your Computer Environment
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
● For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and choose
the smartphone as described in steps
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Windows 8/8.1
● For non-WPS access points, follow steps
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.9
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
access point and choose the smartphone.
● Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
Configure the privacy settings and
send images.
5
●
●
Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
Accessories
settings and send images.
For details, check the following website.
Appendix
Previous Access Points
Installing the Software
Index
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
What you will need:
● Computer
● To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from
● USB cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
* A USB cable is not included. Although you can install the software without using a
cable, some features will not be added.
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
127
Download the software.
1
Without Connecting the Camera
Before Use
● With a computer connected to the Internet,
● Select [Install without connecting
the device] and follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the installation
process.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Access the site for your country or region.
● Download the software.
Install the files.
Camera Basics
4
Begin the installation.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
● Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
● Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
● After installation when the camera is
connected to the computer, turn the
camera off before disconnecting the
cable.
When a message is displayed
prompting you to connect the camera,
choose whether to connect or not.
3
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
Because the content and functions of software vary according to
the camera model, if you have several cameras, you must use
each camera to update to its latest version of the software.
When Connecting the Camera to the
Computer
Accessories
● With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
( )
2
Appendix
Index
( )
1
● Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
● Turn the camera on, and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
128
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
Before Use
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
1
Confirming Access Point Compatibility
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
● For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
2
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
● Click in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
● In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
setting.
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
●
The following Windows settings are configured when you run the
utility in step 2.
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
Accessories
- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
Appendix
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
Index
●
●
If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
●
Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
129
Choose [ ].
3
Before Use
●
●
For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
], and then press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
●
●
This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
Choose [Add a Device].
4
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
► [ ] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Check MAC Address].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [WPS Connection].
5
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[WPS Connection], and then press the
Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
1
[
] button.
● For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
Accessories
Choose [PBC Method].
6
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [PBC
Method], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Appendix
● Press the [
] button to turn the camera
on.
Index
● Press the [ ] button.
● When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
(
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
130
Establish the connection.
Display CameraWindow.
7
10
Before Use
● On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
● Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● On the camera, press the [ ] button to
go to the next step.
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
● The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Import images.
11
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
Choose the target device.
8
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
target device name, and then press the
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
] button.
● Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete. For
instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Install a driver (first Windows
connection only).
9
● When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● Double-click the connected camera icon.
● Driver installation will begin.
● After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
131
Enter the access point password.
3
Before Use
●
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Next], and then press the [ ] button.
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
Camera Basics
●
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
Choose [Auto].
4
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Auto], and then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
● To save images to a connected computer,
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
●
●
To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are
detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the
list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point
settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an
SSID, security settings, and a password.
Connecting to Listed Access Points
●
When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
Accessories
View the listed access points.
1
password in step 3. To use the same password, press the [ ][
buttons to choose [Next], and then press the [ ] button.
]
Appendix
● View the listed networks (access points)
Index
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
Choose an access point.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
network (access point), and then press
the [ ] button.
● To reconnect to the access point, confirm that the target device is
already connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 8 in
●
To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed after connection, and then either follow the procedure in
132
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Before Use
Sending Images to a Registered
Web Service
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
1
and access the camera web link
settings page.
Camera Basics
Registering Web Services
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● From a computer or smartphone, access
iMAGE GATEWAY.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Once the login screen is displayed,
enter your user name and password
to log in. If you do not have a CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow
the instructions to complete member
registration (free of charge).
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
Choose the type of camera.
2
● On this camera model, [
] is displayed
in the Wi-Fi menu.
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
● Once you choose [
], a page is
displayed for entering the authentication
code. On this page in step 7, you will
enter the authentication code displayed
on the camera after steps 3 – 6.
Accessories
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
Appendix
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
3
Index
● Press the [
] button to turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button.
● When the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ] button. Use the
keyboard displayed to enter a nickname
(
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
133
Choose [
].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
], and then press the [ ] button.
Check the confirmation numbers
and complete the setup process.
4
8
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
● Make sure the confirmation number on
the camera matches the number on the
smartphone or computer.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [Authenticate].
5
● Complete the setup process on the
smartphone or computer.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Authenticate], and then press the [
button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
GATEWAY are now added as
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
destinations, and the [
to [ ].
] icon changes
Establish a connection with an
access point.
6
● A message is displayed on the
● Connect to the access point as described
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is finished. To add other
Web services, follow the procedure
● Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
an authentication code is displayed.
Accessories
●
●
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
Appendix
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the menu. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and
choose a device.
Index
Enter the authentication code.
7
● On the smartphone or computer, enter
the authentication code displayed on the
camera and go to the next step.
● A six-digit confirmation number is
displayed.
134
Registering Other Web Services
Before Use
Uploading Images to Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
● Press the [
] button to turn the camera on.
Access the Web service settings
screen.
1
● Press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose the destination.
2
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then
access the Web service settings screen.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
icon of the Web service for sharing, and
then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the Web service you want
to use.
2
● If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
Choose [
].
3
Send images.
3
● In Playback mode, press the [ ] button
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [
button.
to access the Wi-Fi menu.
]
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[
], and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
● The Web service settings are now
updated.
Appendix
the [
] button.
Index
●
If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
update the camera settings.
● When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [ ] button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● After the images are sent, [OK] is
displayed. Press the [ ] button to return
to the playback screen.
135
Before Use
●
●
●
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can also send multiple images at once and resize images or
You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 3.
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [ ].
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
], and then press the [ ] button.
[
Choose [Add a Device].
3
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
Accessories
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
136
Connect the printer to the network.
4
Before Use
Sending Images to Another Camera
● In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. Even Canon-brand cameras that support Eye-
Fi cards cannot be connected to if they do not have a Wi-Fi function.
You cannot connect to PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS/
DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS cameras with this camera.
Choose the printer.
5
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
printer name, and then press the [
button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
Choose an image to print.
6
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
Choose [ ].
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Print], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
], and then press the [ ] button.
[
● For detailed printing instructions, see
● To cancel the connection, press the [
button, press the [ ][ ] buttons on the
confirmation screen to choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
]
Accessories
Choose [Add a Device].
3
Appendix
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
●
●
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
Index
● Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
● Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
137
Send images.
4
Before Use
Image Sending Options
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
resolution (size) before sending. Some Web services also enable you to
annotate the images you send.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
the [
] button.
Notes on Sending Images
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● Keep your fingers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
(
transfers.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● To cancel the connection, press the
[
on the confirmation screen to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
● Up to 50 images can be sent together at once. One movie up to five
minutes (or one digest movie up to 13 minutes) can be sent. However,
Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send. For details, refer to the Web service you are using.
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
Accessories
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
Appendix
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
Index
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
icons.
[Off].
(
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
●
●
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 4.
138
Before Use
Choosing the Image Resolution (Size)
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the resolution by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [
button.
]
]
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● Choosing [ ] or [ ] will resize images that are larger than the
selected size before sending.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Initial Preparations
● Movies cannot be resized.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Preparing the Camera
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending].
Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button,
so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on
the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Adding Comments
Add [ ] as a destination.
1
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
● Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
● To choose a Web service as the
destination, follow the steps in
Accessories
Access the screen for adding
comments.
1
Appendix
● On the image transfer screen, choose
[
] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
2
Index
and then press the [ ] button.
2
3
● Press the [
] button and choose
Send the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
●
●
When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
]
You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
139
Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only
when sending images by pressing
the [ ] button).
3
Before Use
Sending Images
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
● Clear the [ ] button setting if a
smartphone is already assigned to the
Camera Basics
● Access the mobile connection screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Send images.
1
● If you have already assigned [ ] to the
[ ] button, press the [ ] button.
choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● If you have not assigned the button this
way, choose [ ] as described in steps
Preparing the Computer
Install and configure the software on the destination computer.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Once the connection is established,
the images are sent. When the images
have been sent successfully to the
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server, [ ] is
displayed on the screen.
Install the software.
1
● Install the software on a computer
Register the camera.
2
Save the images to the computer.
2
● Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
Accessories
● Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
● Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [ ], and
then click [Add new camera].
Appendix
● Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
● A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
Index
●
When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
● Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [ ].
pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
140
Before Use
●
●
Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app
CameraWindow.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
In camera settings, the smartphone must be allowed to view
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow
application can be added to images on the camera. Images are tagged
with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
●
Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Accessories
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
Appendix
●
Index
141
Before Use
Shooting Remotely
●
●
The camera works in [ ] mode during remote shooting. However,
some FUNC. and MENU settings you have configured in advance
may be changed automatically.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
Movie shooting is not available.
Secure the camera.
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
●
●
Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
No AF frames are displayed. Capture a test image to check the
focus.
● Once remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
Connect the camera and
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
Choose remote shooting.
3
● In CameraWindow on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
● The camera lens will come out. Do not
press near the lens, and make sure no
objects will obstruct it.
Accessories
● Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
Appendix
Index
● At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
Shoot.
4
● Use the smartphone to shoot.
142
Before Use
Connection
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Configurable Items
Web
Services
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
O
O
–
O
–
Editing Connection Information
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
the device to edit.
O
: Configurable
: Not configurable
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing a Device Nickname
● Press the [
] button to turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button.
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to access
the device selection screen, press the
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the icon
of a device to edit, and then press the
] button.
Device Nickname] and press the [
button.
]
[
Choose [Edit a Device].
● Select the input field and press the [
]
2
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Edit
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
Appendix
Choose a device to edit.
3
Index
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
device to edit, and then press the [
button.
]
Connection Info] and press the [
button.
]
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Choose an item to edit.
4
[
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item to edit, and then press the [
button.
]
● The connection information will be
erased.
● The items you can change depend on
what device or service the camera will
access.
143
Before Use
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [
] button and choose
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [Reset Settings].
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Reset Settings], and then press the [
button.
]
Restore the default settings.
3
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
● The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
Appendix
●
To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
Index
144
Before Use
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
commonly used functions as desired, for greater convenience.
8
Camera Basics
Silencing Camera Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
● Choose [Mute], and then choose [On].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button
as you turn the camera on.
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button.
Adjust volume with the [ ][ ] buttons, as needed.
Accessories
Appendix
Adjusting the Volume
Index
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
● Choose [Volume], and then press the [
]
button.
● Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
145
Before Use
Hiding Hints and Tips
World Clock
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
● Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Specify your destination.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
[
] button.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
World], and then press the [ ] button.
[
Date and Time
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
Adjust the date and time as follows.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the
● Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
[
] button.
[
][ ] buttons, and then choose [ ] by
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
to adjust the setting.
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
● Press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Switch to the destination time zone.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
World], and then press the [
button.
● [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen
Appendix
[
]
Index
(
●
automatically update your [ Home] time and date.
146
Before Use
Lens Retraction Timing
Power-Saving Adjustment
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
the [
immediately after you press the [
] button, set the retraction timing to
● Choose [Power Saving], and then press
the [ ] button.
[0 sec.].
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Choose [Lens Retraction], and then
choose [0 sec.].
● After choosing an item, press the [ ][
buttons to adjust it as needed.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Using Eco Mode
●
●
The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
These power-saving functions are not available when you have
Configure the setting.
1
Accessories
● Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose [On].
● [
] is now shown on the shooting
Appendix
● The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
Index
Shoot.
2
● To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
147
Before Use
Screen Brightness
Formatting Memory Cards
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
Screen and viewfinder brightness can be set separately. Activate the
desired display in advance by pressing the [
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you
should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.
] button.
● Choose [LCD Brightness], and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
brightness.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Access the [Format] screen.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Choose [Format], and then press the [
]
button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [OK].
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Cancel], press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
●
For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at
least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when
in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness]
setting on the [ ] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press
and hold the [ ] button again for at least one second or restart
the camera.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
]
Format the memory card.
3
● To begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
Hiding the Start-Up Screen
Accessories
● When formatting is finished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [ ] button.
If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally
shown when you turn the camera on.
Appendix
● Choose [Start-up Image], and then
choose [Off].
Index
●
Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
●
The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
148
Low-Level Formatting
Before Use
File Numbering
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns file numbers.
● Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
][ ] buttons to choose [Low Level
Format], and then press the [ ][
[
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
buttons to select this option. A [ ] icon is
displayed.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
formatting process.
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Continuous
Auto Reset
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory
cards.
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
●
●
of the memory card.
You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
●
●
Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
Accessories
Appendix
on the card folder structure and image formats.
Index
149
Before Use
Date-Based Image Storage
Electronic Level Calibration
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
● Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
level the camera in advance.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Make sure the camera is level.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Place the camera on a flat surface, such
as a table.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Calibrate the electronic level.
2
● Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
the [ ] button.
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Choose [Calibrate] and press the
Change the unit of measurement shown in GPS elevation information
[
] button. A confirmation message is
(
and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
● Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
displayed.
● Choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
Accessories
● Choose [Electronic Level], and then press
the [ ] button.
Appendix
● Choose [Reset], and then press the [
]
Index
button.
● Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
150
Deleting All Copyright Information
Before Use
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
time as follows.
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
● Choose [Copyright Info], and then press
the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
Info].
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Enter Author’s Name] or [Enter Copyright
Details]. Press the [ ] button to access
the keyboard, and enter the name
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
● Press the [
changes?] is displayed, press the [ ][
●
The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
] button. When [Accept
]
buttons to choose [Yes], and then press
the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Checking Certification Logos
● The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
●
●
To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Certification Logo Display], and
then press the [ ] button.
delete copyright information. Some characters entered with the
software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly
recorded in images.
Accessories
Appendix
●
You can check copyright information recorded in images by using
the software, once you save the images to a computer.
Index
151
Before Use
Display Language
Restoring Defaults
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Change the display language as needed.
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
● Choose [Language ], and then press
the [ ] button.
Access the [Reset All] screen.
1
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a language, and then press the [
button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Choose [Reset All], and then press the
]
[
] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Restore default settings.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
●
You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing
● Default settings are now restored.
the [
] button.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
The following functions are not restored to default settings.
[Language
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
152
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
9
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and
other compatible accessories sold separately
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
153
Before Use
System Map
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Flash Units
Speedlite*
Included Accessories
Camera Basics
Battery Pack
NB-10L*1
Battery Charger
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Neck Strap
CB-2LC/CB-2LCE*1
600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, 430EX II,
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
320EX, 270EX II
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Lens Accessories
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*2
Canon-Brand Lens Filter
Lens Hood
LH-DC90
(67 mm dia.)*4
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Memory Card
Card Reader
Windows/
Macintosh
Computer
Power
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
Other Accessories
Cables
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC80
HDMI Cable HTC-100
Accessories
Remote Switch RS-60E3
TV/Video
System
Appendix
Stereo AV Cable
AVC-DC400ST
Index
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
*3 The following accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX, 430EX,
270EX, and 220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2, and Speedlite Bracket
SB-E2.
*4 Requires Filter Adapter FA-DC67A.
154
Before Use
Flash Units
Optional Accessories
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Speedlite 600EX-RT/600EX/580EX
II/430EX II/320EX/270EX II
Camera Basics
● Shoe-mounted flash unit that enables
many styles of flash photography.
Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and
220EX are also supported.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Power Supplies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Battery Pack NB-10L
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
● Prevents unnatural shadows next to
subjects during vertical shooting. Includes
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Charger for Battery Pack NB-10L
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80
● Enables wireless control of slave
Speedlite flash units (except Speedlite
220EX/270EX).
● For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
Accessories
Other Accessories
Appendix
●
●
The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
Index
For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
● For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
● Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy
playback on the larger TV screen.
155
HDMI Cable HTC-100
Before Use
Printers
● For connecting the camera to an HDMI
input of a high-definition TV.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
Remote Switch RS-60E3
Camera Basics
● Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Enables remote shutter button operation
(pressing the button halfway or all the
way down).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Lens Hood LH-DC90
● Prevents extraneous light outside the
angle of view from entering the lens and
causing flares or ghosting, which reduce
image quality.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Filter Adapter FA-DC67A
● Adapter required when mounting a 67
mm filter.
Accessories
Canon Lens Filter (67 mm dia.)
● Protects the lens and enables a variety of
shooting effects.
Appendix
Index
●
A lens filter and lens cap cannot be attached to the camera at the
same time.
156
Before Use
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Using Optional Accessories
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Movies
Playback on a TV
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
Turn the TV on and switch to video
input.
3
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Switch the TV input to the video input you
connected the cable to in step 2.
●
Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Turn the camera on.
4
● Press the [
on.
] button to turn the camera
Playback on a High-Definition TV
Still Images
Movies
● Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV.
Movies shot at a resolution of [
], [
], or [
] can be viewed in
● When finished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
high definition.
Accessories
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
1
2
Appendix
●
Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
Index
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
157
Playback on a Standard-Definition TV
Before Use
●
When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of
the TV as you control the camera.
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
Camera Basics
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Connect the camera to the TV.
2
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into
the video inputs as shown.
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
● Make sure the cable plugs are in video
inputs of the same color.
Make sure the camera is off.
1
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Open the cover.
2
● Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
open the memory card/battery cover, and
then open the coupler cable port cover
as shown.
Accessories
Connect the adapter to the coupler.
3
● Insert the adapter plug fully into the
Appendix
Display images.
3
coupler.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a
Index
images.
●
Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
video output format, press the [
[Video System] on the [ ] tab.
] button and choose
158
Insert the coupler.
4
Before Use
Using an External Microphone
● Insert the coupler as shown until it locks
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
into place.
An external microphone with a mini plug (3.5 mm diameter) can be
recording. Note that the built-in microphone is not used for recording when
an external microphone is connected.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Open the cover and connect the
external microphone.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Lower the cover (1), keeping the coupler
cable in the coupler cable port (2).
( )
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Connect the power cord.
5
● Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
●
●
Any attenuator settings you have configured are also applied to
Connecting an external microphone will deactivate [Wind Filter]
● Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
(
● When finished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Accessories
Appendix
●
●
Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
Index
Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
159
Before Use
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately)
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
For wide-angle shots of backlit subjects without using the flash, attach
optional Lens Hood LH-DC90 to prevent light outside the angle of view
from entering the lens.
Attaching a lens filter to the camera protects the lens and allows you
to shoot with various effects. To attach a lens filter, you will need Filter
Adapter FA-DC67A (sold separately).
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Make sure the camera is off.
( )
1
Attach the filter adapter.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Align the lens hood mark (2) with the
camera mark (1), and turn the lens hood
in the direction of the arrow until it locks
in place.
● Make sure the camera is off.
( )
2
● Align the notches on the camera and the
filter adapter and turn the adapter in the
direction of the arrow until locked.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● To remove the lens hood, turn it in the
opposite direction.
● To remove the filter adapter, turn it in the
opposite direction.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Attach a filter.
2
● Turn the filter in the direction of the arrow
to attach it to the camera.
● Make sure not to attach the filter too
tightly. Doing so could prevent removal of
the filter and damage the camera.
● To attach the lens hood inverted (as
shown) when the hood is not used, align
the lens hood mark (2) with the camera
mark (1), and turn the lens hood in the
direction of the arrow until it locks in
place.
Accessories
( )
1
Appendix
( )
2
Index
●
●
We recommend the use of genuine Canon filters (67 mm dia.).
When not using auto focus to shoot, set the manual focus option
[Safety MF] to [On].
●
●
If you use the built-in flash with the filter adapter attached,
portions of the image may appear darker.
●
●
Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in flash when the lens
When using the filter adapter, be sure to use only one filter at a
time. Attaching multiple filters, or accessories such as a heavy
lens, may cause the attachments to fall off and become damaged.
Do not grip the filter adapter tightly.
hood is attached.
●
●
The filter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the
Remove the filter adapter when not using a filter.
camera at the same time.
160
Before Use
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
●
The filter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the
camera at the same time.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
More sophisticated flash photography is possible with an optional
Speedlite EX series flash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the
optional Speedlite 320EX flash is available.
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series
functions.
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
●
●
Wireless operation of the Speedlite 600EX-RT is not supported.
Non-EX series Canon flash units may not fire correctly or may not
fire at all, in some cases.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Connect the remote switch.
1
●
●
Use of non-Canon flash units (especially high-voltage flash units)
or flash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and
may damage the camera.
● Make sure the camera is off.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Open the terminal cover and insert the
remote switch plug.
Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional
information.
Speedlite EX Series
Shoot.
2
Accessories
Still Images
Movies
● To shoot, press the release button on the
These optional flash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of
flash photography needs.
remote switch.
Appendix
Index
Attach the flash.
1
●
Bulb photography (long exposures) is not supported.
● Make sure the camera is off, and then
attach the flash unit to the hot shoe.
161
Turn the flash on, and then turn the
camera on.
2
Before Use
●
Settings for the built-in flash cannot be configured while a
Speedlite EX series flash is attached, because that setting screen
is no longer accessible.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● A red [ ] icon is now displayed.
●
●
●
●
You can also access the setting screen by pressing the [ ] button
for at least one second.
● The flash pilot lamp will light up when the
flash is ready.
Flash settings in [
] shooting mode can be configured just as
Camera Basics
Choose shooting mode [ ], [ ],
they are in [ ] mode.
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
600EX-RT/580EX II only: [Flash Control] is not available if the
external flash has been set up for stroboscopic flash.
[
], or [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Flash settings can only be configured in
these modes. In other modes, the flash
is adjusted and fired automatically, as
needed.
320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie
recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the [ ] icon is shown.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)
Set the white balance to [ ]
4
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Using the optional Speedlite Bracket SB-
E2 can help prevent unnatural shadows
next to subjects during vertical shooting.
Configure the external flash.
5
● Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
● To keep the LCD screen out of the way
of the bracket, use the screen closed and
facing outward.
● Options already set on the flash itself are
displayed.
Accessories
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
adjust the setting.
Appendix
● Available items vary depending on the
shooting mode and the flash attached
Index
(
162
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately)
*3 Can be configured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and flash exposure
compensation set on the flash is [+0]. When you adjust flash exposure
compensation on 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II Speedlites, the
camera display will be updated accordingly.
*4 Can be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the
flash unit.
*5 1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX.
*6 For options other than On/Off, configure the setting on the flash unit itself. Not
available with Speedlite 430EX II/320EX/270EX II/270EX. When this item is set
to [On], [Shutter Sync.] cannot be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to
[2nd-curtain], it will be changed to [1st-curtain].)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
The following items are available in [ ], [
], [
], or [ ] mode. In
other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Corr.] and [Red-Eye Lamp] can
be configured. (With autoflash control, the flash always fires.) However,
external flash units do not fire in modes that the built-in flash does not fire
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting Mode
*7 Can only be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].
*8 Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Slow Synchro],
[Safety FE], [Red-Eye Corr.], and [Red-Eye Lamp] by using [Reset All] on the
Item
Options
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Auto*1
Manual*2
O
O
O
O
O
O
[
–
Flash Mode
O
●
●
Flash settings in [
] shooting mode can be configured just as
Flash Exp.
Comp*3
–
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
–3 to +3
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
they are in [ ] mode.
In [
] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping,
1/128*5 to 1/1 (in 1/3-stop
increments)
Flash Output*4
O
O
Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting
scenes determined by the camera are not displayed, and the
1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/Hi-
speed
Shutter Sync.
On
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
Slow Synchro
Off
Accessories
Wireless Func.*6
Red-Eye Corr.
Red-Eye Lamp
On/Off
On/Off
On/Off
On
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
Appendix
Index
Safety FE*7
Off
O
O
Clear Flash Settings*8
*1 E-TTL mode is used for the flash.
*2 M mode is used for the flash.
In [ ] shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the flash. In this case,
when the flash fires, flash exposure compensation set on the flash is applied to
the flash output level set on the camera.
163
Before Use
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
Using the Software
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced
below, with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer.
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
system requirements and compatibility information, including support in
new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Camera Basics
Software
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Windows
Windows 8/8.1
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it,
you can do the following things on your computer.
Operating
System*
Mac OS X 10.9
Mac OS X 10.8
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● CameraWindow
- Import images and change camera settings
* When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in
● ImageBrowser EX
- Manage images: view, search, and organize
- Print and edit images
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements,
including supported OS versions.
● Digital Photo Professional
- Browse, process and edit RAW images
Installing the Software
●
Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
Accessories
Software Instruction Manual
Appendix
Refer to the instruction manual when using the software. The manual can
be accessed from the help system of software (some software excluded).
Index
164
Before Use
● Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
Saving Images to a Computer
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
For other functions, refer to the help system of the relevant software
(some software excluded).
Camera Basics
Connect the camera to the
computer.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Double-click [
].
● With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
( )
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Save the images to the computer.
3
( )
1
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
● Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
] button to
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
2
● For instructions on viewing images on a
computer, refer to “Software Instruction
Accessories
● Press the [
] button to turn the camera
Appendix
on.
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
Index
● Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
● In the screen that displays, click the [
]
link to modify the program.
165
Before Use
●
●
●
Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [
icon in the taskbar.
]
Printing Images
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
Still Images
Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
Easy Print
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image file sizes.
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.
- Some functions provided by the software may not be available,
such as movie editing.
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
1
Connect the camera to the printer.
2
Accessories
● Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Appendix
● Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
Index
166
Turn the printer on.
Turn the camera on.
3
4
Before Use
Configuring Print Settings
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
● Press the [
] button to turn the camera
on.
Access the printing screen.
1
● After following steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
[
] button to access this screen.
Choose an image.
5
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
Configure the settings.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option.
Print the image.
6
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Print], and then press the [ ] button.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Printing now begins.
File No. Prints images with the file number added.
● To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is finished.
Prints images with both the date and file
number added.
Both
–
● When you are finished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
Off
Default Matches current printer settings.
Accessories
–
Off
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
●
●
For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
On
Appendix
RAW images cannot be printed.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Index
Choose the number of copies to print.
Copies
–
Cropping
Paper
Settings
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
–
(
167
Cropping Images before Printing
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
Choose [Paper Settings].
1
● After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
Choose [Cropping].
1
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[
] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
Choose a paper size.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
● To move the frame, press the
Choose a type of paper.
3
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To rotate the frame, press the [ ] button.
● Press the [ ] button, press the
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
[
Accessories
press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Print the image.
3
Choose a layout.
4
to print.
Index
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
●
●
Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
● When choosing [N-up], press the [ ][
buttons to specify the number of images
per sheet.
]
Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with
[Date Stamp
] selected.
● Press the [ ] button.
Print the image.
5
168
Available Layout Options
Before Use
Printing Movie Scenes
Default
Bordered
Matches current printer settings.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
Access the printing screen.
1
N-up
Choose how many images to print per sheet.
● Follow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Prints images for identification purposes.
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an
aspect ratio of 4:3.
(
ID Photo
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
], and then press the [ ] button. This
screen is displayed.
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Fixed Size
Choose a printing method.
2
Printing ID Photos
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the printing method.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Still Images
Movies
Choose [ID Photo].
1
Print the image.
3
● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(
Movie Printing Options
the [ ] button.
Single
Prints the current scene as a still image.
Accessories
Choose the long and short side length.
2
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, file
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
Appendix
Sequence
item. Choose the length by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then press the [
]
Index
button.
●
●
To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button again.
Choose the printing area.
3
[ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand
PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier
models.
● Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
area.
Print the image.
4
169
Before Use
Standard
Index
One image is printed per sheet.
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Print Type
Still Images
Movies
Both standard and index formats are
printed.
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
Both
On
Off
On
Off
Images are printed with the shooting date.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Date
–
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Images are printed with the file number.
File No.
–
●
RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
All image print list settings are cleared after
printing.
On
Off
Clear DPOF
data
Configuring Print Settings
–
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print
list.
●
Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
●
[
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
● Press the [
] button, and then
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab.
Choose and configure items as desired
(
●
Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date
twice.
Accessories
Appendix
●
●
●
Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
Index
Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
170
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
1
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Choose an image.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Setting Up Printing for All Images
● You can now specify the number of
copies.
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
● If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[Select All Images] and press the [
button.
]
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specify the number of prints.
3
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the
number of prints (up to 99).
Clearing All Images from the Print List
Accessories
● To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
Appendix
[Clear All Selections] and press the [
button.
]
● Printing quantity cannot be specified for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
Index
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● When finished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
171
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Before Use
●
After importing images to your computer, also refer to “Software
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
information.
● When images have been added to the
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
Adding Images Individually
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [Select].
1
● Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
Adding Images to a Photobook
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when
ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own
printer.
Choose an image.
2
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● [ ] is displayed.
● To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
Choosing a Selection Method
Accessories
● Press the [
[Photobook Set-up] on the [
] button, choose
] tab, and
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Appendix
then choose how you will select images.
● When finished, press the [
to return to the menu screen.
] button
Index
●
[
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
172
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[Select All Images] and press the [
button.
]
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[Clear All Selections] and press the [
button.
]
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
173
Before Use
Troubleshooting
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
10
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Power
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
●
●
●
●
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
●
Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
●
●
The lens is not retracted.
Accessories
●
Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
Appendix
The battery pack is swollen.
●
Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Index
Display on a TV
174
Subjects in shots look too dark.
Before Use
Shooting
●
●
●
●
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Cannot shoot.
●
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●
●
●
●
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
-
The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
or LED lighting.
No date stamp is added to images.
●
●
Configure the [Date Stamp
added to images automatically, merely because you have configured the [Date/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●
●
●
●
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
[ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
White spots appear in flash shots.
●
This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.
[
●
●
●
●
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
Shots look grainy.
●
Accessories
●
Appendix
●
be activated in flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
Shots are out of focus.
Index
●
Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
●
●
●
●
●
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
●
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
●
Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in
●
To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
175
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
Sound is not played during movies.
Before Use
●
The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
●
in the movie is faint.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
Shooting Movies
Memory Card
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
The memory card is not recognized.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
●
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
(
[
●
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to
●
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
transfer speed as follows.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
-
-
-
-
Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [
] button
down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Zooming is not possible.
●
]
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [ ] button.
(
Subjects look distorted.
●
The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and
●
Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
Accessories
try again.
malfunction.
●
In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during detailed
information display, magnified display, or index display. Switch to single-image
display and a viewing mode other than detailed information display. Similarly, the
Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display
according to specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback.
The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Appendix
Playback
Index
Playback is not possible.
●
●
●
Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
for details on folder structure and file names.
[
] will not be displayed even in playback mode, when using magnified display
or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. [ ] will also not
be displayed when an image is displayed by specifying search conditions. Cancel
filtered image playback.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
●
●
●
Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
●
[
] will not be displayed when the camera is connected to a printer or computer
with a cable. Disconnect the cable.
There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
176
Cannot add a device/destination.
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
Before Use
●
A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
●
Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to [ ] or
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new
[
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
Movies may take a long time to send.
●
●
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application CameraWindow on
To add a computer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
displayed.
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
] is
●
●
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
●
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band.
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
●
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Cannot connect to the access point.
●
Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
specify a supported channel manually.
Cannot send images.
●
●
●
●
The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
RAW images cannot be sent. In [ ] mode, only the JPEG images are sent.
However, RAW images can be sent using Image Sync.
Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent
Accessories
these image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Appendix
Index
Cannot resize images for sending.
●
Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original
size.
●
Movies cannot be resized.
177
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/Cannot
rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to category/
Unselectable image./No identification information
Before Use
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Capture or Playback
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
(
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
No memory card
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
Invalid selection range
●
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Memory card locked
●
The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the
Exceeded selection limit
●
●
●
(
Cannot record!
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
(
(
●
If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
Naming error!
(
●
The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [ ] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
Insufficient space on card
●
Accessories
(
(
Lens Error
Appendix
●
This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
No Image.
Index
●
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
●
The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
A camera error was detected (error number)
●
If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV
●
●
●
Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
178
File Error
Sending failed
Memory card error
Before Use
●
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
●
If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Print error
●
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Receiving failed
Insufficient space on card
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
●
There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufficient space.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Ink absorber full
●
Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
●
When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
●
Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Insufficient space on server
Cannot determine access point
●
Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
●
The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
space.
reconnecting again.
●
No access points found
Check network settings
Accessories
●
●
Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
●
Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
Appendix
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
Index
●
IP address conflict
●
Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
●
●
You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
●
●
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
179
(17) Digital zoom magnification
Before Use
(
On-Screen Information
(
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting (Information Display)
Camera Basics
(
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
The same information is shown on the viewfinder.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
)
33
(34)
(
)( )( )( ) ( )( )( )( ) (
)
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
)
34
(
(
21
)
)
20
( )
1
(
)
32
( )
2
( )
3
(
22
)
( )
4
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(
(39) Exposure compensation level
( )
5
(
) ( ) (
35 36 37
)
( )
6
( 72)
( )
7
( )
9
8
* In [
] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
( )
(
)
)
(
)
23
10
(
24
Battery Level
(
)
(
)
(
) (
)
(
)
(
) (
)
25
26
27 28
29
30 31
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
(
39
)
(
38
)
Display
Details
Sufficient charge
Accessories
Appendix
Slightly depleted, but sufficient
Nearly depleted—charge the battery
pack soon
(
Index
(Blinking red)
(3) Flash exposure compensation / Flash
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately
[Charge the battery]
180
(27) Image quality / Frame rate (movies)
Before Use
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(
(31) File size
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
( )( ) ( )( )( )( )( )( ) (
)
10
(
)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
( )
1
(29) Compression (image quality)
(
12
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
13
14
15
16
(
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(
(
)
(
) ( ) (
)
(
) (
)
17
18 19 20
21 22
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(movies)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
( )
31
●
Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
23
25
27
29
30
(
)
(
)
(
)
24
26
28
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(15) Exposure compensation level
(
(2) Current image no. / Total no. of
images
(
Accessories
(20) White balance correction
Appendix
(
Index
(10) Folder number - File number
(
(23) Red-eye correction
(
Image quality (movies)
(
181
Summary of Movie Control Panel
Before Use
Functions and Menu Tables
The following operations are available on the movie control panel
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Exit
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Play
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Slow Motion (Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the playback
speed. No sound is played.)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Aperture Value
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [
button.)
]
Shutter Speed
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
/
/
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
/
/
Accessories
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
●
During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
/
/
Index
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
182
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
4
*
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
2
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
3
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
*5 /
*5 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*5 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
183
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*3 FE lock not available in [ ] flash mode.
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*4
[
] is set with [
], AF lock, or [ ].
/
/
/
/
/
*5 Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases.
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
FUNC. Menu
Accessories
Appendix
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
184
/
/
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
4
Delay*
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
3
*2 / *2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
*
Shots*
5
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
Accessories
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
Index
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
185
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*6 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*6 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 White balance is not available.
*3 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue,
and skin tone. Default: 3. These setting are applied in all modes.
/
/
*4 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*5 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of
shots.
*1 /
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
186
Before Use
Shooting Tab
On
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
1
Face Detect*
*2 /
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
Tracking AF
*2 / *2 /
*3 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
/
/
/
On
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
4
FlexiZone/Center*
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*2 /
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
*5 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Standard
*2 /
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
On
Accessories
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
*2 /
/
Index
/
/
/
/
Off
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
1.6x/2.0x
/
/
*2 /
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
187
Before Use
On
Zoom Memory
On
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Off
*2 /
*2 /
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
/
MF Memory
On
Off
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
2x/4x
Off
*2 /
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
On
Accessories
Peaking
On/Off
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
Off
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
Level
High/Low
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
188
Color
Red/Yellow/Blue
2nd-curtain
*2 / *2 /
Before Use
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Red-Eye Corr.
On
Flash Mode
Auto
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Off
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
Manual
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Red-Eye Lamp
On/Off
/
/
/
/
*2 /
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Flash Exp. Comp
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Safety FE
On
/
/
/
/
Flash Output
Minimum/Medium/Maximum
Accessories
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
Off
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
Shutter Sync.
1st-curtain
*2 / *2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
189
Before Use
Max ISO Speed
On
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Rate of Change
Off
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
*2 /
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Sound rec.
Auto
Low/Standard*/High
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Manual
On/Off*
*2 /
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Disable
Accessories
*2 /
*2 /
/
Center
Appendix
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
Level
0 – 47* – 63
*2 / *2 /
/
/
AF Point
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
190
Wind filter/Attenuator
Display Info
Off
Before Use
Wind Filter: Auto
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Wind Filter: Off
Detailed
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Attenuator: Off
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
On
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Attenuator: On
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
Off
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
Display Time
Off
Shooting Info
Accessories
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
Quick
Grid Lines
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./Hold
Electronic Level
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
191
Histogram
*2 /
2
Before Use
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Large/Medium/Small*
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
On/Off
Seek Assist
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
On
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
IS Mode
Off
Off
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Continuous
Auto Zoom
Face/Upper Body/Whole Body/Manual
Accessories
*2 / *2 /
Appendix
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
Shoot Only
Off
*2 /
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Dynamic IS
1
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
192
Set
Before Use
Off
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Date
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
*1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.
*2 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*4 [FlexiZone] in [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes, otherwise [Center].
*5 [On] when subject movement is detected in [ ] mode.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Date & Time
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Include Stills*/No Stills
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
On*/Off
Accessories
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Set
*2 /
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
193
Before Use
Set Up Tab
My Menu Tab
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Item
Ref. Page
Item
Ref. Page
Mute
My Menu settings
Volume
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Hints & Tips
Date/Time
Playback Tab
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Time Zone
Item
Ref. Page
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Lens Retraction
Eco Mode
Image Search
List/Play Digest Movies
Smart Shuffle
Slideshow
Power Saving
LCD Brightness
Start-up Image
Format
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Erase
Protect
File Numbering
Create Folder
Units
Rotate
Favorites
Photobook Set-up
i-Contrast
Electronic Level
Video System
Wi-Fi Settings
Mobile Device Connect Button
Copyright Info
Certification Logo Display
Language
Accessories
Red-Eye Correction
Cropping
Appendix
Index
Resize
My Colors
Face ID Info
Transition Effect
Index Effect
Scroll Display
Group Images
Auto Rotate
Reset All
194
Item
Ref. Page
Before Use
Handling Precautions
Resume
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set Shortcut button
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
Print Tab
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Item
Ref. Page
–
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
Print
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Select Images & Qty.
Select Range
Select All Images
Clear All Selections
Print Settings
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
Accessories
Appendix
● Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery pack’s remaining
charge, remove it from the camera, and store it in a plastic bag
or similar container. Storing a partially charged battery pack over
extended periods (about a year) may shorten its life or affect
performance.
Index
195
Wi-Fi
Before Use
Specifications
IEEE 802.11b/g/n*
* 2.4 GHz band only
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Standards
Transmission
Methods
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)
Camera Specifications
Infrastructure mode*1, Ad hoc mode*2
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup
*2 Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Communication
Modes
Camera Effective
Pixels (Max.)
Approx. 16.1 million pixels
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Supported
Channels
1 – 11 (PC2188) or 1 – 13 (PC2154)
Model numbers indicated in parentheses
Lens Focal
Length
65x zoom: 3.8 (W) – 247.0 (T) mm
(35mm film equivalent: 21 (W) – 1365 (T) mm)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
LCD Viewfinder
Security
Viewfinder
Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots
Dioptric Adjustment Range: –4.0 to +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
3.0-type color TFT LCD
Effective Pixels: Approx. 922,000 dots
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm equivalent)
LCD Monitor
File Format
21 – 5460 mm
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version
1.1) compliant
Digital Zoom [Standard]
(Represents the combined focal length
of optical and digital zoom.)
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG), RAW (CR2 (Canon
Original))
Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264; Audio:
MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo))
Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x
Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x
33.6 ‒ 2184.0 mm
42.0 ‒ 2730.0 mm
Data Type
Accessories
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Analog audio output (stereo)
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)
Interface
Appendix
Index
Battery Pack NB-10L
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80
Power Source
Dimensions
(Based on CIPA
Guidelines)
127.6 x 92.6 x 114.3 mm (5.02 x 3.65 x 4.50 in.)
Approx. 650 g (approx. 22.93 oz.; including the
battery pack and memory card)
Approx. 607 g (approx. 21.41 oz.; camera body only)
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
196
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots per Memory Card
Before Use
Screen On
Approx. 340
Approx. 340
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect
ratio.
Screen Off
Viewfinder On
Number of Shots
Number of Shots per Memory
Compression
Eco Mode On
Screen On
Approx. 450
Card (Approx. shots)
Recording Pixels
Ratio
Camera Basics
Approx. 1 hour
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
8 GB
1058
32 GB
Movie Recording
Time*1
Screen Off
Viewfinder On
Auto Mode /
(Large)
16M/
4608x3456
Approx. 1 hour
Approx. 2 hours
4272
6883
8059
12391
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movie Recording Screen On
Time
1705
1996
3069
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Screen Off
Viewfinder On
(Medium 1)
8M/
3264x2448
(Continuous
Approx. 2 hours
Approx. 6 hours
Shooting*2)
Playback Time
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
4723
8469
19064
34184
(Medium 2)
3M/2048x1536
*1 Time under default camera settings, when normal operations are performed,
such as shooting, pausing, turning the camera on and off, and zooming.
*2 Time available when shooting the maximum movie length (until recording stops
automatically) repeatedly.
27291
40937
110150
165225
(Small)
0.3M/640x480
● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement
guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
RAW Images
4608x3456
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
–
317
1284
Accessories
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Appendix
Index
197
Recording Time per Memory Card
Shooting Range
Before Use
Maximum Wide Angle
Maximum Telephoto
Recording Time per Memory Card
Shooting Focusing
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Image Quality
(
)
(
)
Mode
Range
8 GB
32 GB
–
0 cm (0.0 in.) – infinity 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) – infinity
1 m (3.3 ft.) – infinity 15 m (49 ft.) – infinity
30 min. 3 sec.*1
2 hr. 1 min. 27 sec.*2
–
43 min. 29 sec.
2 hr. 3 min. 55 sec.
5 hr. 14 min. 34 sec.
2 hr. 55 min. 43 sec.
8 hr. 20 min. 32 sec.
21 hr. 10 min. 38 sec.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) – infinity
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other
modes
0 – 50 cm
(0.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
*
*
–
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
0 cm (0.0 in.) – infinity 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) – infinity
* Not available in some shooting modes.
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Continuous Shooting Speed
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB,
or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and
Continuous Shooting Mode
Speed
Approx. 6.4 shots/sec.
Approx. 3.8 shots/sec.
Approx. 4.6 shots/sec.
59 seconds when shooting in [
1 hour when shooting in [
], [
] or [
], or approximately
].
● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been
reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory
cards are recommended.
● Using an 8 GB UHS-I memory card specified in Canon testing
standards. Note that the number of shots varies depending on
subjects, the brand of memory card, and other factors.
Accessories
Flash Range
Appendix
Maximum wide angle (
Maximum telephoto (
)
50 cm – 5.5 m (1.6 – 18 ft.)
1.8 m – 3.0 m (5.9 – 9.8 ft.)
Index
)
198
Shutter Speed
Battery Charger CB-2LC/CB-2LCE
Before Use
Rated Input:
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
16 VA (100 V) – 22 VA (240 V), 0.18 A (100 V) –
0.12 A (240 V)
[
] mode,
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
automatically set
range
1 – 1/2000 sec.
Rated Output:
8.4 V DC, 0.7 A
15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2, 1.6, 1.3, 1, 0.8,
0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/13,
1/15, 1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60, 1/80,
1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200, 1/250, 1/320, 1/400,
1/500, 1/640, 1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600,
1/2000
Charging Time:
Charge Indicator:
Approx. 1 hr. 50 min. (when using NB-10L)
Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (two-
indicator system)
Camera Basics
Available values in
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
[
], [ ], or [
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
mode (sec.)*
Lens Hood LH-DC90
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Camera Mount:
Max. Diameter x Length: ɸ70.0 x 27.7 mm (ɸ2.76 x 1.09 in.)
Weight: Approx. 9 g (approx. 0.32 oz.)
Bayonet
* In [ ] mode, shutter speeds of 1/25 seconds or slower are not available.
Aperture
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
f/number
f/3.4 / f/8.0 (W) – f/6.5 / f/8.0 (T)
Available values in
f/3.5, f/4.0, f/4.3, f/4.5, f/5.0, f/5.6, f/6.3, f/6.5,
f/7.1, f/8.0
[
], [ ], or [
]
mode*
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.
Battery Pack NB-10L
Accessories
Type:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
7.4 V DC
920 mAh
Nominal Voltage:
Nominal Capacity:
Charging Cycles:
Appendix
Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Index
Dimensions:
Weight:
32.5 x 45.4 x 15.1 mm (1.28 x 1.79 x 0.59 in.)
Approx. 41 g (approx. 1.45 oz.)
199
Editing or erasing connection
Exposure
Focusing range
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Framing Assist
FUNC. menu
A
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
F
G
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
D
Date/time
B
H
Batteries
Flash
Handheld nightscene
High dynamic range
→
Date/time (date/time battery)
Battery pack
Accessories
→
Defaults Reset all
Appendix
Focusing
Index
I
Image quality
E
C
→
Compression ratio (image quality)
Images
Editing
Camera
→
Playback Viewing
Servo AF 84
200
Before Use
P
T
Toy camera effect
Face self-timer
Wink self-timer
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
J
→
Playback Viewing
Sending images to another
Servo AF 84
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
L
→
→
Batteries
Battery charger
V
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
M
Program AE 71
Shooting
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
→
Shooting date/time Date/time
R
RAW 89
Software
Menu
Movies
W
Accessories
Appendix
S
Saving images to
Screen
Index
Image quality (resolution/
→
Wrist strap Strap
Super slow motion movie
→
Menu FUNC. menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
Z
→
Memory cards
Seek Assist 43
N
→
Neck strap Strap
201
● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
Before Use
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certification labels from the product
● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
Accessories
● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
Appendix
Index
● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
202
Trademarks and Licensing
● Unauthorized network access
Before Use
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Camera Basics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
Accessories
Appendix
Disclaimer
Index
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specifications and appearance.
● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
203
|